JP6802138B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, a game machine has displayed various effect images on a display screen according to a game state and a lottery result of a big hit lottery. For example, a variable display of a decorative symbol and a stop display are realized, and a lottery result is notified by a combination of the decorative symbols displayed as a stop. Further, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a special effect such as displaying a so-called reach state on the display screen or making a special character appear on the display screen may be realized. By realizing such a special effect with a predetermined probability, the player's interest in the effect is improved. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while enjoying the production.

However, the display screen of the effect display device can be visually recognized by surrounding players, especially those who are playing in the next seat, and the effect image displayed on the display screen can be easily seen. Then, when the player is peeped by the surrounding players in this way, it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, the unpleasant mood is aroused, and the motivation to play is reduced.

[Application example 1]
It ’s a game machine,
A game board having a game area and an opening,
An entrance provided in the game area and capable of accepting game media,
A game medium detecting means capable of detecting acceptance of the game medium by the receiving port, and
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information in response to detection of the game medium by the game medium detection means, and
A lottery means capable of performing a lottery as to whether or not a privilege is given to a player based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and
A display means having a display area arranged in the opening, and
A movable decorative body arranged at a position around the display area when viewed from the front,
When the display area is viewed from the front of the movable decoration arranged at a position around the display area , the movable decoration blocks the front of the display area so that the visible area becomes smaller. Decorative body movable means to make
Sound output means to output sound and
An effect control means capable of controlling the display means, the decorative body movable means, and the sound output means, respectively.
With
The display means can display a display effect including a variation effect in the display area according to the result of the lottery based on the lottery information.
The effect control means
The visible area becomes smaller when the display area is viewed from the front in accordance with the output of a specific sound by the sound output means while the display means advances the display effect in the display area according to the result of the lottery. At the same time, the movable display area is movable so that the visible area of the display area becomes smaller when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged, as compared with the case where the display area is viewed from the front. The movable decorative body effect for operating the decorative body is configured to be feasible with the movable decorative body arranged at a position around the display area.
The movable decorative body capable of executing the movable decorative body effect is provided with a light emitting unit whose light emission is controlled toward the player side surface by the effect control means.
When the movable decorative body effect is executed, when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged, the visible area of the display area is larger than that when the display area is viewed from the front. The movable decorative body, which is operated by the decorative body movable means so as to be small, is in a standby state before being operated by the decorative body movable means and after being operated by the decorative body movable means through the opening. Arranged so that it can be seen in any of the operating states
The light emitting portion provided on the movable decorative body is subjected to the movable decorative body effect, and the display area is viewed from the front when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged. Light emission is controlled when the visible area of the display area is smaller than in the case.
In the standby state in which the movable decorative body is not operated by the movable decorative body, the line of sight of the movable decorative body is blocked by the movable decorative body when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided so as to protrude from the display area side of the display means toward the player side.

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the action of the peeping player and, by extension , suppress the decrease in the motivation to play due to the peeping .

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear view of the outer frame. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB (A) and FIG. 12A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC (B), FIG. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view (A) and the perspective view (B) seen from the bottom which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the ball feed unit in the door frame base unit by disassembling. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the joint unit in the door frame base unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner. (A) is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows the top lamp illumination unit diagonally from the front lower part. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) afterwards. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front together with the top lamp base by disassembling the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the left rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit by disassembling. It is an exploded perspective view which shows disassembled the right-handed rotating lamp in a top lamp illumination unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows disassembled the central rotating lamp in a top lamp illumination unit. It is a front perspective view of a dish unit. It is a rear perspective view of a dish unit. It is a top view of the dish unit. It is sectional drawing of AA in FIG. 42. It is a rear view which shows the state which the dish back plate of a dish unit is removed. It is a perspective view which shows later with the plate back plate of the plate unit and the ball rental unit removed. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front by disassembling the dish unit for each main component. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from behind. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front by disassembling the dish unit main body in a dish unit. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from behind. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball pulling mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball pulling mechanism in a dish unit later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the operation button unit in the dish unit by disassembling. It is the bottom view of the operation button unit board of the operation button unit in a dish unit with the board removed. It is the bottom perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a dish unit from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a dish unit by disassembling. It is sectional drawing of the handle device attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which constitutes a handle device, and a joint unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation diagram for demonstrating the operation of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects the handle device and the hitting ball launching device. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the plate unit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of the game ball in the plate unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long ball inlet and a storage dish in a dish unit. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front by disassembling the glass unit. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before mounting a part. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before mounting a part. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before mounting a part. It is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before mounting a component. It is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached the component. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which supported the main body frame which attached the component to the outer frame, from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame in which a component is attached. It is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached the component. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine cut by the horizontal line in the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a top view of the game board. It is an enlarged perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a partial perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is sectional drawing which shows the front component, the game panel, and the panel holder of a game board cut in the vertical direction in the assembled state. It is an exploded perspective view which viewed diagonally from the front by disassembling the front component, the game panel, the panel holder, etc. which mainly constitute a game board. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed diagonally from the rear. It is the perspective view which shows from the diagonal rear with the main control board box fixed to the board board holder for a board. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view which is disassembled into a board holder for a board, a drawer holder, and a main control board box and shown diagonally from behind. It is the schematic of the exploded perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of the function display sticker. It is a partial view which looked at the function display sticker of a game board through a game window. It is a perspective view (A) of the whole of the hitting ball launching apparatus, and the perspective view (B) in a state where the launching motor part is removed. It is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching apparatus. It is a front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hitting ball launching apparatus and a launching rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a hitting ball launching apparatus and a launching rail in a state where the operation handle portion is not operated. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hitting ball launching apparatus and the launching rail in the state of operating the operation handle part. It is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and AA cross-sectional view (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. It is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing (A) and plan view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the relationship between the main body frame, a ball passage unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship with a ball passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is a perspective view seen from the back of the ball passage unit. It is a front view of the ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between a payout motor and a sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the passage and driving relation of a prize ball unit. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is sectional drawing which cut at the bottom rocking plate part provided in the full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a rear perspective view which shows the relationship between a lock device and a main body frame. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the hooking structure to the main body frame of a lock device. It is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine. It is an enlarged sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between the lock device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is a side view (A) of the lock device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. A perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device, a perspective view (B) of a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the lock device, (C). It is an exploded perspective view of a lock device. It is a front view for demonstrating the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame. It is a front view for demonstrating the operation of the fraud prevention member. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of a substrate unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a substrate unit. It is a front view seen from the front side of the frame board holder which is the main body of a board unit. It is a rear view of the substrate holder for a frame. It is a rear view of a board unit. It is a rear view of the board unit with the payout control board box and the terminal board box removed. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board provided in a board unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the electrical connection between a board unit and a game board. It is a part of the rear view of the pachinko machine showing the wiring between the payout control board and the board unit. It is a front view of the game board for demonstrating the cross-sectional part of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138. FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137. It is a perspective view which was seen from the back of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, and was in the state which the cover body was opened. It is a side view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached. It is a pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached, and is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is a pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached, and is the perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps with the lower side part of the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the operation of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. It is a BB sectional view of FIG. 143. It is a CC sectional view of FIG. 143. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left rear. It is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the disassembled thing diagonally from the back. It is a perspective view of each device mounted on a game panel disassembled for each component and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the start port unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which disassembled each member of a start port unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the electric winning opening unit seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the electric winning opening unit disassembled for each member and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the side winning opening unit seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the gate unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the front by disassembling each of the main constituent members of the back unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the character decoration unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the character decoration unit disassembled for each member and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the revolving light unit seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the revolving light unit disassembled for each member and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the upper left movable decoration unit viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the upper left movable decoration unit disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the upper pistol unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the lower left movable decorative unit viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the lower left movable decorative unit disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower movable decoration unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the lower movable decorative unit disassembled for each member and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which saw a part of the back unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of a part of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back box diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper space formation unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the upper space forming unit disassembled for each member and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the lower space forming unit and a support box viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the lower space forming unit and the support box disassembled for each member and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the display unit viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the display unit disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a front view of the game board which shows the operating state of each movable decoration unit. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the player side on the right side sitting next to each other. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the player side on the left side sitting next to each other. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, which constitute the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 and is a game board. A game window 101 and its game window 101 in which a player can visually recognize a main body frame 3 on which the 4 can be mounted, and a game area 605 formed on the game board 4 which is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and into which a ball is driven. The door frame 5 is provided with a dish unit 300 as a storage dish for storing balls that are arranged below and paid out as a result of the game.

A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 for reinforcing the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 in front of the lower portion. Further, in addition to the game board 4 being detachably attached to the main body frame 3 as described above, a ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 5) is attached to the lower part of the back surface thereof, and the door frame 5 and the main body excluding the game board 4 are attached. A board unit 1100 provided with various control boards, power supply boards, etc. for controlling electrical components provided in the frame 3 is attached to cover the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3. The cover body 1250 is detachably provided. Further, in addition to the plate unit 300 described above, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the game window 101. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, so that the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, the members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 12 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10, a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 12A, and a sectional view taken along the line DD (C). , EE sectional view (D). Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure between the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view (A) which shows the mounting state, and the perspective view (B) which is seen from the bottom. Further, FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. , 13 are assembled in a square shape by connecting with a connecting member 19 for connecting the respective ends. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape having a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding central portion is formed in the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the flat surfaces of the left and right portions that are fitted to the portions 20 and are lowered by one step, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are attached to one side surface of the left and right portions that are lowered by one step. The inner surface of the is in contact with each other.

Then, in that state, the insertion holes 21 formed on both sides of the engaging notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engaging notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right one steps of the connecting member 19 are lowered. Although it is displayed on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 of FIG. 9, a plurality of (two in the case of drawing) connecting holes 22 formed on the plane of the portion of the above, the other connecting member 19 It is fastened with a plurality of connecting screws 23 (two in the case of the drawing) from above or below in accordance with (also present in the above), and further, a plurality of (two in the case of drawing) are bored in the upper and lower ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. A plurality of (two in the case of the drawing) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the case of the drawing) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 are matched and a plurality (three in the case of the drawing) from the lateral outside. By fastening with the connecting screws 26 and 27 (three in the case of the figure), the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19, but connects to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 Is composed of a lightweight metal, for example, an extruded plate of an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wooden material as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is set with respect to the vertical surface of the island. It is necessary to perform the fixing work, but such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the island, so that the nails can be easily driven. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an extruded aluminum alloy plate is that the wall thickness can be formed thinner while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood, so that the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 is formed. The lateral width of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 when viewed from the front can be widened. Therefore, the game board 4 having a large size in the left-right direction can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of aluminum alloy flat plates, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plates 12 (the side frame plates 13 also have exactly the same structure). A space 28 (the space 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) is formed inside the rear portion of the rear portion by ribs and is drawn out so that the wall thickness h1 of the rear portion becomes thick. There is. Of course, this wall thickness h1 has a size equal to or slightly thinner than the conventional wooden wall thickness.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (D), in front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 is fitted. The groove 29 of the frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 8). As shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the side frame plate 12 from the groove 29 to the front end has a flat plate shape whose inner side surface is in contact with the other portion of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 lowered by one step. However, a shallow recess is formed in the flat plate portion for reducing the material. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12 (B), a recess 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is inserted is inserted into the opposite surface (outer surface) on which the groove portion 29 is formed. The recess 30 of the plate 13 is formed (shown in FIG. 9).

Then, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19, the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is placed on the outer side of the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side formed as described above. A mounting hole 31 for fastening with the fastening screw 32 is bored in, and the fastening screw 34 is aligned with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support metal fitting 66 at the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is bored. Further, a mounting hole 35 for fastening the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fastening screw 36 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

On the other hand, in the side frame portion 13 on the open side, in addition to the configuration for mounting the connecting member 19, a mounting hole 37 for mounting the closing protrusion 38 with the mounting screw 39 is bored in the upper portion thereof, and is closed in the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the protrusion 41 with the mounting screw 42 is bored, and a mounting hole 43 for fastening the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fastening screw 44 is provided at the lowermost position. It is formed.

The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are attached to the hook portion 1054, 1065 of the locking device 1000 along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (FIG. 121). (See), and as will be described in detail later, the hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing protrusions 38, 41 are connected by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction. The engagement can be disengaged and the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the cover reinforcing metal fittings 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 have the main body frame 3 mounted on the upper surface thereof when closed, and the cover reinforcing metal fittings 14 The surface and side surfaces of the are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the upper support metal fitting 45 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 which also have a function of connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 are attached along one side upper surface. A lower support metal fitting 66 is provided. The upper support metal fitting 45 is formed with a support hook hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion 46 toward the center of the tip, and the support hook 47 is formed. The shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of the upper shaft support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

Further, the lower support metal fitting 66 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support protrusion 68 is projected upward at the protruding portion, and the frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is projected onto the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in (see FIG. 72) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support hole formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 with the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, the main body frame 3 By hooking the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support bracket 503 to the support hook hole 47, the shaft can be easily opened and closed.

Further, the upper support metal fitting 45 is attached to the mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side, and is formed on the upper support metal fitting 45 when the upper support metal fitting 45 is attached. The mounting screws 51 are inserted from above so that the plurality of mounting holes 48 (two in the figure) and the plurality of mounting holes 50 (two in the figure) bored in the mounting step 49 are aligned with each other, and the upper frame is inserted. The upper support metal fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by fastening to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

Further, on the outer side of the upper support metal fitting 45, there is a hanging piece portion 53 that abuts on the outside of the side frame plate 12, and a mounting hole is formed in the hanging piece portion 53, and the mounting hole and the mounting hole 31 are formed. The upper support metal fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 are fixed by fastening with the fastening screw 32, and the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 are connected via the upper support metal fitting 45. ..

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 66 is fastened with the fastening screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 are aligned as described above, and further, the lower support fitting 66 is further supported. By inserting the mounting screw 71 into the mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal plane of the metal fitting 66, the metal fitting 66 is fastened to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is formed by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 which are the constituent members by the connecting member 19. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and is fixed in a state where the connecting member 19, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength is high and a sturdy square shape is formed. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state between the connecting member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step in the groove 29. Since one part of the portion is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 becomes strong, which also improves the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately positions the connecting member 19. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the upper support metal fitting 45 is attached to a predetermined position after connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 by the connecting member 19. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island platform (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lender). Further, even when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, a lock member 80 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting 45 for rotatably supporting the main body frame 3. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the support projecting piece 46 of the upper support metal fitting 45 has a tip portion formed as an arcuate flat plate and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support project piece 46. A hanging wall 46a bent into a right angle is formed. The hanging wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support metal fitting 45, and also make the lock member 80 described below invisible when viewed from the front to improve the appearance. The lock member 80 is used as a portion to which the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, which will be described next, comes into contact with the elastic piece 80c, or is used as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outward from the support protruding piece 46. Further, the support hook hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed by bending so as to be slightly inclined inward from the side opposite to the side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed and further toward the center of the tip. Has been done. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

Further, the above-mentioned hanging wall 46a is formed by being bent at a right angle from the front inlet end of the support hook hole 47 along the outer edge of the support protrusion piece 46 and the upper support metal fitting 45, and the support hook hole 47. It is bent inward at the front entrance end of the hook to form a stop hook 47a. Further, a mounting hole 46b is formed substantially in the center of the support protruding piece 46, and the lock member 80 is rotatably supported by the rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46b. The lock member 80 is molded of synthetic resin, and the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c extends integrally on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in the L-shaped base formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. When the lock member 80 is attached to the mounting hole 46b by the rivet 81 and rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support projecting piece 46, the tip of the elastic piece 80c abuts as shown in FIG. 14 (B). The portion is in contact with the inner surface of the hanging wall 46a, and the stopper portion 80a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space for inserting the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 47.

By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging lower portion 47a of the inlet end portion (in this state). In the normal axial support state where there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop hanging portion 47a and the stop hanging portion 47a is not in contact with each other), the support hook hole 47 formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion and the tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a are respectively displaced in the oblique direction and face each other. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 Since the load on the tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that the lock member 80 rotates smoothly when the tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a rotates by operating the operation portion 80b. .. In the figure, the arc center of the arc-shaped tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is applied to the shaft. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support hook hole 47. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80), so that the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment for rotating the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protruding piece 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 and the support hook hole 47. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side of the hole. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c, and prevent the shaft support pin 504 from falling out of the support hook hole 47 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 is rotated in a direction (clockwise in the figure) to be separated from the support protrusion 46, one side of the tip of the stopper 80a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 47a and further disengaging, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 46.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arc-shaped tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80), so that the shaft support pin 504 is A rotation moment is not generated in the lock member 80 even if an acting force F in the direction of pulling out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 is applied. As shown in FIG. 15B, a stopper is described. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position of the lock member 80 by the rivet 81 is set inside the support protrusion piece 46, the shaft support pin 504 tilts the support hook hole 47. When an acting force F is applied in the direction of coming out along the inclination of the shaped hole and abuts on the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F abuts on the shaft support pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. The component force F1 acting on the portion (in the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and the component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and the inner surface on one side of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. When divided into F2 and F2, a rotational moment acts by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow (clockwise rotation direction) shown in the figure, but even if the lock member 80 rotates, the tip of the stopper portion 80a is one. Since the side only abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiments shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. When F is applied and comes into contact with the tip surfaces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 of the acting force F and the tip surfaces 80e and 80f. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where the lock member 80 is not generated or at a position where a rotational moment is generated in which the tip portion of the lock member 80 rotates toward the outside of the support protrusion 46. No load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a comes into contact with the stop hanging portion 47a. The member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 80 is directed toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46 at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and the lock member The applicant has confirmed that the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 46 because even if the 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a. doing.

The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 and pushed into the drawing. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 80 rotates the elastic piece 80c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support hook hole 47. Then, when the shaft support pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47, the shaft support pin 504 and the front end side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not come into contact with each other as shown in FIG. 16C. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 47, and at the same time, at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 80a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support hook hole 47. Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 504 from the support hook hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 46, and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 80a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 47. Therefore, the shaft support pin 504 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 47. After that, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and disengaging the support hole formed in the frame support plate 506 from the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66. ..

As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support metal fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be attached to the back surface of the upper support metal fitting 45 extremely easily, and since it has an extremely simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 and comes into contact with the tip surfaces 80e and 80f, the shaft support pin 504 of the acting force F The locking member 80 is rotated at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the component force F1 acting on the contact portions between the tip surfaces 80e and 80f, or the locking member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46 by the tip portion. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and the lock member 80 is integrated with the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the formed elastic piece 80c due to creep, prevent the shaft support pin 504 from falling out of the support hook hole 47 for a long period of time, and prevent the lock member 80 from falling off from the support hook hole 47, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, the stopper portion Since one side of the tip of the 80a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front surface side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. Further, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 450 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101, and a security cover 470 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And have. Although a detailed description will be described later, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker illumination units 120 on both the left and right sides of the game window 101, and the side speaker illumination unit 120 and the top lamp electric are provided. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the plate unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for driving a game ball on the left side (open side) of the plate unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 viewed from the rear. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feed unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. Further, FIG. 31 (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the joint unit in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically long polygonal shape. The 110, the side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and the metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 fixed to the mounting base 160 and sending game balls supplied from the plate unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650. It is arranged substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160 on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and the rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400 is performed by the ball launching device 650. It mainly includes a joint unit 180 that transmits to the door.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to the lower left decorative substrate 190 fixed to the lower left side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and the ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball removal path cover 191 that closes the ball removal path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door decoration drive. The door decorative drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, the handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed directly above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body under the game window 101. A wiring cover 195 that closes the wiring accommodation groove 110b formed on the rear side of the 110 and capable of accommodating the wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal plate 194 from the rear side, and the left and right upper parts of the game window 101, respectively. A stop lever 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the overall rigidity is increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. At the same time, it has enough strength to sufficiently support the top lamp lighting unit 200, the plate unit 300, and the like.

Further, a plurality of LEDs 190a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left decorative substrate 190 of the door frame base unit 100, so that the left end portion of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, can be light-emitting and decorated. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the illuminated parts and electric parts (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board and the like, the speakers 121 and 391, and the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400) provided in the door frame 5. The wiring from the switch, ball rental unit 301, operation button unit 370, etc.) is integrated and connected, and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated into the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to the prize ball payout control board 1186 via 1102 or the like and the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of the main control board box 624 attached to the game board 4.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a vertically long inner shape and is polygonal. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

Further, below the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a prize ball passage port 111 through which the prize ball communication gutter 343 of the plate unit 300 penetrates above the shaft support side (left side in front view) and a prize ball. A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage port 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feed unit 170 on the upper part of the open side (right side in front view). The feed opening 113, the lock hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 1010 described later is inserted closer to the open side of the ball feed opening 113, and the cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. And are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base main body 110, respectively.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 of the security cover 470 and a mounting opening 116 on each of the left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101, which will be described in detail later. Speaker openings 117, which are arranged on the outside and allow the rear ends of the left and right lower side speakers 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 to be described later to escape, are formed so as to penetrate each of them.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a glass unit support step 110a that is recessed substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can come into contact with the glass unit, and the game window 101. A wiring accommodating groove 110b formed by being recessed to the front side at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 on the lower side and capable of accommodating wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 which is recessed toward the front side and a joint unit 180 is attached. It is provided with a joint unit mounting recess 110c for the purpose.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, door frame projecting pieces 110d, 110e are formed so as to project a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and these door frame projecting pieces 110d, 110e are the main body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engaging grooves 584 and 585 of the door frame 5. The amount of protrusion of the door frame projecting piece 110d to the rear is formed to be larger than the amount of projecting of the door frame projecting piece 110e.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp illumination unit 200 on the upper front surface thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. , A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker illumination unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the plate unit 300, and the like at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker illumination unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 lights the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light emitting decoration), and four arranged at the four corners of the game window 101. The side speaker 121 can emit predetermined music, sound effects, etc. to the player, and the left side speaker lighting unit 120L arranged on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of 101 of the game window. And the right side speaker lighting unit 120R arranged on the open side (right side in the front view) of the game window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically long illumination unit 122 and an acoustic unit 130 having side speakers 121 arranged above and below the illumination unit 122 in each of the left and right units, and the left and right units are substantially symmetrical. It is composed.

More specifically, the illumination portion 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123 and a side illumination lens 123, as shown in FIGS. 26 to 29. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 arranged on the rear side and forming a column together with the side illumination lens 123, a side illumination base 125 arranged on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124, and a side illumination base 125. The side decoration substrate 126 fixed to the rear side, and the upper and lower ends of the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to wrap from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 to form the side illumination lens. After the side illuminated flash cover 127 that supports 123 and the side illuminated reflector 124, the translucent flash lens 128 that closes the flash opening 127a of the side illuminated flash cover 127 from the rear side, and the flash lens 128. It is provided with a flash substrate 129 arranged on the side and supported on the front surface of the side illumination base 125.

The illumination unit 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a capable of emitting light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination substrate 126, and high brightness above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. White LED 126b and the above are mounted respectively. Further, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side illumination substrate 126 on the side illumination reflector 124 and the side illumination base 125, respectively, and the side decoration substrate is formed. Light from the LEDs 126a and 126b mounted on the 126 can be emitted forward through the opening 125a of the side illumination base 125 and the opening 124a of the side illumination reflector 124.

Further, in the illumination unit 122, inside the transparent cylinder of the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124, the entire inner circumference of the side illumination lens 123 and a part of the inner circumference of the side illumination reflector 124. The side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is arranged in this way. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that makes transmitted light or reflected light look like a pearl or a bright color. From the player's point of view, the side lens sheet 123a causes the side illumination lens 123a. And, it is possible to give an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent columnar (pipe) formed by the side illuminated reflector 124.

Further, in the illumination unit 122, the side illumination reflector 124 is provided with a dividing wall 124b that vertically divides the plurality of openings 124a formed corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 126a of the side decoration substrate 126 into three groups. The split wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b makes it possible to clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into three upper, middle, and lower parts. Therefore, by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative substrate 126 to emit light, the fluorescent tube can be made to emit light entirely or partially, or light can be emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

Further, the side illumination reflector 124 is formed with a lens recess 124c recessed from the front side at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decoration substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens from the front side is formed in the lens recess 124c. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is to be inserted. The illumination unit 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit strong light before the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b emit light. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that makes it light up after only both ends shine, just like a real fluorescent lamp.

Further, the illumination unit 122 is provided with a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) capable of emitting strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. By emitting the flashlight 129a, the flashlight can be emitted to the player side.

The acoustic unit 130 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 is a substantially disk made of a speaker decoration 131 arranged at the front portion and having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a and a punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. A speaker cover 132 having a shape, a decorative spacer 133 arranged behind the speaker cover 132, holding the speaker cover in cooperation with the speaker decoration 131, and having a circular speaker front support port 133a, and a speaker of the decorative spacer 133. It mainly includes a side speaker 121 arranged so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back holding member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that fits from the rear side on the outer periphery of the side speaker 121. ..

As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different shapes of the speaker decoration 131, the decorative spacer 133, and the back pressing member 134 depending on the mounting position. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the acoustic portion 130 on the upper left in front view has a decorative portion 131b in which the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back presser member 134 is formed with a back presser decorative portion 134b that is paired with the decorative portion 131b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic portion 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 which is arranged above the back presser decorative portion 134b of the back presser member 134 and covers the lower side of the upper shaft support portion 146 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 below the shaft pin 145. There is. Further, in the acoustic portion 130 at the lower left when viewed from the front, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having the decoration portion 131b, and the spacer decoration portion 133b in which the decoration spacer 133 is paired with the decoration portion 131b of the speaker decoration 131 is provided. It is formed in a plate shape, and the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the acoustic unit 130 on the upper right when viewed from the front, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the decorative spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the acoustic portion 130 at the lower right when viewed from the front, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decorative spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having the spacer decorative portion 133b that abuts on the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. At the same time, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. The lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decorative base 136 having a penetrating back pressing member fixing port 136a capable of inserting and fixing the back pressing member 134 from the front side on the rear side of the back pressing member 134. ..

As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101 at the top, bottom, left, and right, and are probable to the head of the player playing the game. Is also arranged at the top, bottom, left, and right positions, so 2.1ch surround with independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and lower speaker 391 described later) added to each side speaker 121. By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic effect) than before. The side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the mid-range to high-range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low-range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforcing sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, which is attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has an upper shaft support portion 146 having shaft pins 145 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. A lower shaft branch 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed on the shaft. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 503 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 509 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is provided so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge thereof is formed. It is a lower bent projectile 149 that is bent backward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent projectile 150 that is bent backward on both sides of the upper long side edge. However, the portion sandwiched between the upper bent projecting pieces 150 on both sides thereof is a vertically bent projecting piece 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent projectile 149 is not so large, and the lower bent projectile 149 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form an uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the protruding amount of the upper bent projecting piece 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the protruding amount of the lower bent projecting piece 149 to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools from below to some extent, but rather, the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is the vertically bent projecting piece 151.

The vertically bent projecting piece 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper end edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In addition, the upper end piece of the vertically bent projecting piece 151 engages with the engaging groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially center in the width direction (front-back direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. .. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 except for the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an open side outer bent projecting piece 153 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144. The open-side inwardly bent projectiles 154 are formed respectively, and the open-side inwardly bent projectiles 154 are formed so as to extend backward longer than the open-side outerly bent projecting pieces 153. Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent projecting pieces 155, 156 bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof, respectively. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side thereof. Further, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is attached to the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting stand / ball feed unit]
Next, the mounting base 160 and the ball feed unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is mounted so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin like the security cover 470. It is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape with the front open. In order to smoothly guide the ball launched from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. It is formed so as to sandwich the 515, and the ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 160. By the way, the mounting table 160 according to the present embodiment has an opening 162 for the prize ball passage port that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passage port covering portion 152 formed on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 at the upper portion on the shaft support side thereof. It is formed, and a ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for mounting the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower portion on the open side thereof. The area diagonally from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is the ball feed guide surface 161.

Further, in the lower part of the middle of the mounting base 160, a notch 164 for a lid is formed in which a finger can be inserted when removing the ball removal path cover 191, the door decoration drive board 192 and the door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later. At the same time, a vertical wall 165 is formed on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the standing wall 165 is for restricting the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward in contact with the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

Further, the mounting base 160 is provided with a security projectile piece 166 that is obliquely projected rearward from below the ball flying guide surface 161 to the opening for the prize ball passage port 162. As described above, the security projectile piece 166 has an inner protrusion on the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and an inner protrusion between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the security space 586. It constitutes an engaging portion.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feed unit 170 is rotatably supported by a box-shaped main body portion 171 fixed to the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 and a support shaft 171a of the main body portion 171. It includes a feed member 172 and a weight 173 that rotates the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward and is rotatably supported by the ball feed member 172. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the flow end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocating movement difference of the ball hammer 687 of the ball launcher 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515 through the hit ball supply port 171b formed in the main body portion 171.

Reference numeral 174 in the drawing is an E-ring, which prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. Is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Subsequently, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is a joint with a slide body 182 housed inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 and slidable in the lateral direction, and a slide body 182 housed in the slide body 182. It is composed of a cover body 184 that covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped box with an open front surface, and a cam insertion opening 115 is provided on the rear surface. Further, a pair of mounting holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 are formed in one of the corners of the joint unit mounting recess 110c located substantially diagonally. Further, on the upper and bottom sides of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c, an arcuate contact convex portion for contacting the outer surface of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 and allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly. 110 g (in FIG. 31 (B), only the contact convex portion 110 g on the lower side is shown, and the contact convex portion 110 g on the upper side is not shown) is projected.

On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so as to be movable in the space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 in the left-right direction. It is formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, and on the rear wall, two guide protrusions 182a that protrude backward by a predetermined amount and are arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction, and are arranged below the guide protrusion 182a on the right side in rear view. A plate-shaped slide projecting piece 183 projecting rearward and a wiring through tube portion 428 of a handle device 400, which will be described later, are formed between the two guide projections 182a on the left side of the slide projecting piece 183 when viewed from the rear. It is provided with a rectangular tubular member through opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction at the time of sliding (to the right in the rear view) is cut diagonally. Further, on the front wall of the slide body 182, a cam engaging recess 182c in which the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is housed is formed in a U shape by ribs. Then, a part of the vertical portion of the rib forming the cam engaging recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to project into the cam engaging recess 182c, and the portion is in contact with the cam 416. It has become.

Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped box with an open front surface, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the cover body 184. After the two horizontally elongated guide horizontal holes 194a for guiding the movement, the insertion horizontal hole 184b into which the slide projecting piece 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle portion 410. The wiring opening 184c, which is attached to the end and is inserted from the cam insertion opening 115, faces the rear end of the wiring cylinder portion 428, and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c so as to project outward from the corresponding positions. It is provided with a formed mounting hole 184d. The cover body 184 can be mounted on the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fastening a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c via the mounting hole 184d. ..

In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and the cover body 184 is covered from the front in that state. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide side hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion side hole 184b, respectively. Then, after coating, the slide body 182 is housed inside by screwing the slide body 182 into the mounting hole 110f via the mounting hole 184d, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp illumination unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit from diagonally front and lower. Is. FIG. 34 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration from the front, and FIG. 34 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) afterwards. Further, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled together with the top lamp base from the front, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating light in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating light in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the central rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patrite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of these revolving lamps 244, 264 and 284 are arranged in order from the left side in front view. The top lamp lighting unit 200 is fixed to the front surface of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210, and is fixed to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 sandwiched between them. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating light unit 240, right rotating light unit 260, and center rotating light unit 280 mounted on the front surface of the top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating light unit 240, right rotating light unit 260, and It mainly includes rotating light covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating light unit 280 and attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit (). See FIG. 34).

Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further prepared. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224,226,231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a in the top lamp lighting unit 200, the motors 245, 265, 285 and the boards 248 of the revolving light units 240, 260, 280. , 268, 288, 296, and LED 453a of the glass unit 450 described later, for relaying and supplying power from the power supply board 1136 (described later). Further, the top lamp decorative drive substrate 206 emits light from the LED in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LED in the central revolving light unit 280, and the motors 245, 265, 285 of each revolving light unit 240, 260, 280. The drive is for driving based on a control signal from the peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface has a shape substantially along with the game window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is partitioned in the middle of the front-rear direction. The mounting boss 110h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side of the top lamp base 210 at a position along the outer circumference thereof, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the front side. Are fitted to position each of them, and are provided with a plurality of substantially tubular mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted. The tip of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front of the door frame base unit 100. By fastening a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) can be mounted and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having an insertion hole in which the rear end of the fixed boss 221j projecting rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 is fitted and a predetermined screw can pass through. ing. The top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other by fastening a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side via the fixed boss portion 212. It has become.

Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted near the right end portion when viewed from the front, and the connector 205a is provided through the connector opening 213. Is designed to face from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further, board mounting portions 214 are provided on the left and right sides on the rear side of the top lamp base 210, respectively, and the top lamp decorative drive board 206 is mounted on the board mounting portions 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Subsequently, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 in which the top lamp base 210 can be covered from the front and the rear side is open. This reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder in which three revolving lights 244, 264 and 284 are mounted side by side on the front surface, and a large protrusion forward between the central revolving light 284 and the left and right revolving lights 244 and 264. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical portion 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined portion 221b (see FIG. 33). ). Further, the reflector base 210 is provided with vertically long bulging portions 221e protruding forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f having a vertically long opening is formed on the front surface of the bulging portion 221e. As shown in the figure, the reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three revolving lights 244, 264 and 284 are recessed rearward due to the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b and the two bulging portions 221e. It has become.

Further, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape in which the space between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (the position where the central revolving light 284 is arranged) is recessed rearward, and two. Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening 221g that penetrates in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially center in the left-right direction. Further, the reflector base 221 is equipped with a revolving light that allows the front end of the revolving light unit bases 241,261,281 of the revolving light units 240, 260, 280 equipped with the revolving lights 244, 264, 284 to pass from the rear side. The mouth 221h is formed. Further, the reflector base 221 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 221i that are fitted with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210 and projecting rearward, and a plurality of mounting bosses 221i that are fitted with the fixed boss portion 212 of the top lamp base 210 and projecting rearward. It is equipped with a fixed boss 221j. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reflector base 221 is also provided with a mounting boss 221k that can be directly mounted to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

By the way, in the top lamp reflector unit 220, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 fixed at substantially the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 arranged at positions corresponding to the lens opening 221 g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 arranged behind the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted on the front surface, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side to close the opening 221c, and the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 sandwiching the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222. It is provided with a pair of partition decorative substrates 226 that are arranged and have an LED 226a mounted on the front surface.

The top inner lens 222 is made of a transparent resin, and has three parts: a substantially trapezoidal curved surface-shaped curved lens portion 222a that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221 and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. It includes a partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening portion 221d, and a round lens support portion 222c that abuts on the rear end of the round lens 225. A saw-shaped diffusion lens portion 222d is formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and light can be emitted in a manner different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side even when the light is not emitted. Can be diffusely reflected.

Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a projecting piece 222e projecting from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d to the rear in a plate shape, and a lens sheet 223 sandwiched between the upper and lower projecting pieces and supported on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged in a row at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. It is also distributed in positions. As a result, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusion lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that makes the transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 and the reflected light from another light source look like a pearl or a bright color. Further, the LED 226a mounted on the partition decorative substrate 226 is an ultra-bright LED, and is capable of emitting a strong flash of light.

Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a vertically long slit 221f formed in the left and right bulging portions 221e of the reflector base 221 and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. The lens retainer 228, the lens sheet 229 arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221 and the top side substrate base 230 holding the lens sheet 229 on the rear side of the reflector base 221. The top side substrate 231 is further provided with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating the front top side lens 227 with light via the lens sheet 229 on the front surface.

The top side lens 221 is formed of a transparent resin in a dogleg shape in a plan view, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at the upper and lower ends, respectively, and the locking pieces 227b at the lower end are used as a reflector base. After locking with the lower end of the slit 221f in 221 and pressing the locking piece 227a at the upper end with the top side lens presser 228, it can be attached to the reflector base 221. Further, the lens sheet 229 arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of the same optical sheet as the above lens sheet 223, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure, and is a reflector base. By attaching it to the 221 lens, it is possible to give an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227.

Further, as shown in the figure, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and the light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 which is fixed to the rear side through the frame is emitted from the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be irradiated to the front surface through the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating light units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp lighting unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left revolving light unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a is positioned so as to project forward from the revolving light mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. The rotating light unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and the substantially annular rotation arranged coaxially with the opening 241a of the revolving light unit base 241 and fixed to the upper surface of the revolving light unit base 241. The revolving light base gear 243, which is arranged coaxially with the revolving light base 242 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the revolving revolving light base 242, and its lower surface so as to hang down from the revolving light base gear 243. The revolving light 244 fixed to the revolving light 244 and the revolving light 245a are arranged on the axis behind the revolving light mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the revolving light base gear 243, and the revolving light unit 245a is the upper surface of the revolving light unit base 241. The left rotating light motor 245 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light unit base 241 so as to project upward from, and the transmission gear 246 fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the revolving light motor 245 and meshing with the revolving light base gear 243. A rotating part holder that covers the entire rotating light base gear 243 and a part of the transmission gear 246 from above, supports the rotating light base gear 243 in cooperation with the rotating part base 242, and is fixed to the rotating light unit base 241. Left rotating light substrate 248 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 247 coaxially with the revolving light base gear 243 and capable of emitting light toward the revolving light 244 below. And has.

Further, the left rotating light unit 240 is equipped with a rotating light unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotation position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotation position of the rotation light 244, and a left rotation position detection sensor 250. The counterclockwise rotation position detection board 251 is further provided.

The revolving light unit base 241 of the revolving light unit 240 has a mounting step portion 241b formed on the upper surface thereof along the inner circumference of the opening 241a, and hangs downward at a position rearward from the opening 241a. It is provided with a mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d arranged on the rear side of the opening 241a to fix the left revolving light motor 245, and rotates in the mounting step portion 241b from above. The part base 242 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 242 has a shaft support port 242a having a small diameter coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating light unit base 241 and a left rotation position detection at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the rotating light base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251 and a wiring locking portion 242c that is arranged behind the substrate support portion 242b and locks the wiring connected to the revolving light substrate 248 and the counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251. It has.

Further, the rotary light base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear axle that can be inserted inside (not shown), a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear axle and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotation position detection that protrudes outward in the radial direction from the outer circumference of the lower surface. It is provided with a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and by being inserted into the shaft support port 242a, the rotary light base gear The 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. Further, in the revolving light unit 240, the rotating position of the revolving light 244 can be detected by detecting the revolving position detection piece 243b of the revolving light base gear 243 with the left revolving position detection sensor 250. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward at a position coaxial with the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the revolving light base gear 243. Holder axle cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the revolving light base gear 243, and by inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 243a of the revolving light base gear 243, the revolving light The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder axle. That is, in the left rotating light unit 240 of this example, the rotating light base is formed by the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, the gear shaft cylinder and shaft support hole 243a of the rotating light base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. The gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating light substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft of the rotating portion holder 247. Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 is formed with a substrate supporting portion that supports the upper end of the left rotating position detecting substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting portion 242b of the rotating portion base 242 on the lower surface thereof. The left rotation position detection board 251 is narrowly fixed by the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

Further, as shown in the figure, the revolving light 244 of the revolving light unit 240 is arranged below the revolving light lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped revolving light lens 252 arranged under the revolving light base gear 243. It is composed of a reflector 253 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light base gear 243 and a reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the revolving light 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-shaped base portion 253a, an opening 253b formed in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. It is provided with a curved reflecting portion 253c that hangs downward from the lower surface of the revolving light, and a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and have an upper end that can come into contact with the rotating light base gear 243.

In the revolving light 244, the lower surface of the revolving light lens 252 faces from the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the revolving light lens 252 is formed with an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 253d into the insertion hole 252a and then fixing the mounting boss 253d to the revolving light base gear 243, the revolving light lens 252 is narrowed between the revolving light base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. Further, the reflector cover 254 of the revolving light 244 has a substantially octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper portion, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating light unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a protrudes forward from the left rotating light mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. The revolving light unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and the revolving light unit base 261 arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the revolving light unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the revolving light unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating light base gear 263 arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hanging from the revolving light base gear 263. The revolving light 264 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light 264 and the revolving light unit 265a are arranged on the axis behind the revolving light mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the revolving light base gear 263. The right rotating light motor 265 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating light unit base 261 so as to project upward from the upper surface of 261 and the transmission gear fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the right rotating light motor 265 and meshing with the rotating light base gear 263. 266, the entire revolving light base gear 263 and a part of the transmission gear 266 are covered from above, and the revolving light base gear 263 is pivotally supported in cooperation with the revolving part base 262 and fixed to the revolving light unit base 261. Rotating part holder 267 and clockwise rotation with a high-brightness color LED (not shown) that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 267 coaxially with the revolving light base gear 263 and can emit light toward the revolving light 264 below. It includes a light board 268 and.

Further, the right rotating light unit 260 is equipped with a rotating light unit cover 269 that covers the rotating part holder 267 from above, a right rotation position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotation position of the rotation light 264, and a right rotation position detection sensor 270. Further includes a right rotation position detection substrate 271 and the like.

The revolving light unit base 261 of the right revolving light unit 260 has a mounting step portion 261b formed on the upper surface thereof substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 261a, and hangs downward at a position rearward from the opening 261a. It is provided with a mounting portion 261c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a to fix the right rotating light motor 265, and rotates in the mounting step portion 261b from above. The part base 262 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 262 has a shaft support port 262a having a small diameter coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating light unit base 261 and a right rotation position detection at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the rotating light base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271, and a wiring locking portion 262c that is arranged behind the substrate support portion 262b and locks the wiring connected to the right rotating light substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271. It has.

Further, the rotary light base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262. A cylindrical gear axle that can be inserted inside (not shown), a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear axle and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotation position detection that protrudes outward in the radial direction from the outer circumference of the lower surface. It has a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating portion base 262, and by being inserted into the shaft support port 262a, the rotary light base gear The 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. Further, in the right rotating light unit 260, the rotating position of the rotating light 264 can be detected by detecting the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating light base gear 263 with the right rotation position detection sensor 270. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 267 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward at a position coaxial with the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating portion base 262 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 263a of the revolving light base gear 263. Holder axle cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the revolving light base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the revolving light base gear 263, the revolving light The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder axle. That is, in the right rotating light unit 260 of this example, the rotating light base is formed by the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, the gear shaft cylinder and shaft support hole 263a of the rotating light base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. The gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating light substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotating portion holder 267. Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 267 is formed with a substrate supporting portion that supports the upper end of the right rotating position detecting substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting portion 262b of the rotating portion base 262 on the lower surface thereof. The right-handed rotation position detection board 271 is narrowly fixed by the rotating portion base 262 and the rotating portion holder 267.

Further, as shown in the figure, the revolving light 264 of the right revolving light unit 260 is larger than the revolving light 244 of the left revolving light unit 240 as a whole, and has a transparent disk shape arranged under the revolving light base gear 263. It is composed of a revolving light lens 272, a reflector 273 arranged under the revolving light lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 covering the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the revolving light 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-shaped base portion 273a, an opening 273b formed in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. It is provided with a curved reflecting portion 273c that hangs downward from the lower surface of the base portion 273c, and a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and have an upper end that can come into contact with the rotating light base gear 263.

In the revolving light 264, the lower surface of the revolving light lens 272 faces from the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the revolving light lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 273d into the insertion hole 272a and then fixing the mounting boss 273d to the revolving light base gear 263, the revolving light lens 272 is narrowed between the revolving light base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. Further, the reflector cover 274 of the revolving light 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper portion, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 273 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central revolving light unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the revolving light mounting port 221h at the center in the left-right direction of the reflector base 221. The revolving light unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and the revolving light unit base 281 are arranged coaxially with the opening 281a of the revolving light unit base 281 and fixed to the upper surface of the revolving light unit base 281. The rotating part base 282 which is substantially annular, the rotating light base gear 283 which is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and hanging from the rotating light base gear 283. The revolving light 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the revolving light 285a are arranged on the axis behind the revolving light attachment port 221h of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the revolving light base gear 283. The central revolving light motor 285 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light unit base 281 so as to project upward from the upper surface of the unit base 281 and the revolving light base gear 283 fixed to the rotating shaft 285a of the central revolving light motor 285 and mesh with each other. The transmission gear 286, the entire revolving light base gear 283 and a part of the revolving light base gear 286 are covered from above, and the revolving light base gear 283 is pivotally supported in cooperation with the revolving part base 282 and fixed to the revolving light unit base 281. It has a rotating part holder 287 and a high-brightness color LED (not shown) that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the revolving light base gear 283 and can emit light toward the revolving light 284 below. It includes a central revolving light substrate 288.

Further, the central revolving light unit 280 is equipped with a revolving light unit cover 289 that covers the revolving part holder 287 from above, a central revolving position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the revolving light 284, and a central revolving position detection sensor 290. It also includes a central rotation position detection substrate 291.

The revolving light unit base 281 of the central revolving light unit 280 has a mounting step portion 281b formed on the upper surface thereof substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 281a and hangs downward at a position rearward from the opening 281a. It is provided with a mounting portion 281c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a to fix the central revolving light motor 285, and rotates in the mounting step portion 281b from above. The part base 282 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 282 has a shaft support port 282a having a small diameter coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating light unit base 281 and a central rotation position detection at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the rotating light base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b that supports the lower end of the substrate 291 and a wiring locking portion 282c that locks the wiring that is arranged behind the substrate support portion 282b and is connected to the central revolving light substrate 288 and the central rotation position detection substrate 291. It has.

Further, the rotary light base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating portion base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating portion base 282. A cylindrical gear axle that can be inserted inside (not shown), a shaft support hole 283a that has a smaller diameter than the gear axle and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotation position detection that protrudes outward in the radial direction from the outer circumference of the lower surface. It is equipped with a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating portion base 282, and by being inserted into the shaft support port 282a, the rotary light base gear The 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. Further, in the central revolving light unit 280, the rotating position of the revolving light 284 can be detected by detecting the revolving position detection piece 283b of the revolving light base gear 283 with the central revolving position detection sensor 290. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward at a position coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating portion base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the revolving light base gear 283. Holder axle cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the revolving light base gear 283, and by inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the revolving light base gear 283, the revolving light The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder axle. That is, in the central rotary light unit 280 of this example, the rotary light base is formed by the shaft support port 282a of the rotary portion base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and shaft support hole 283a of the rotary light base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotary unit holder 287. The gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating light substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft of the rotating portion holder 287. Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 287 is formed with a substrate supporting portion that supports the upper end of the central rotating position detecting substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting portion 282b of the rotating portion base 282 on the lower surface thereof. The central rotation position detection board 291 is narrowly fixed by the rotation portion base 282 and the rotation portion holder 287.

Further, as shown in the figure, the revolving light 294 of the central revolving unit 280 has a size intermediate between the revolving light 244 of the left revolving light unit 240 and the revolving light 264 of the right revolving light unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped revolving light lens 292 arranged under the revolving light base gear 283, a reflector 293 arranged under the revolving light lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light base gear 283, and a reflector 293. It is composed of a reflector cover 294 that covers the above. The reflector 293 of the revolving light 284 is plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and has a disk-shaped base portion 293a, an opening 293b formed in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. It is provided with a curved reflecting portion 293c that hangs downward from the lower surface of the base portion 293c, and a plurality of mounting bosses 293d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293a and have an upper end that can come into contact with the rotating light base gear 283.

In the revolving light 284, the lower surface of the revolving light lens 292 faces from the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the revolving light lens 292 is formed with an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 293d into the insertion hole 292a and then fixing the mounting boss 293d to the revolving light base gear 283, the revolving light lens 292 is narrowed between the revolving light base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. Further, the reflector cover 294 of the revolving light 284 has a substantially octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper portion, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

By the way, as shown in the figure, the central revolving light unit 280 of the present embodiment has a plurality of formed on three front side surfaces of the revolving light unit cover 289 between the revolving part holder 287 and the revolving light unit cover 289. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of projecting portions 295a inserted into the notch portion 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 arranged on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted on the surface thereof. Further prepared. The lower ends of the cover lens 295 and the cover decorative substrate 296 are supported by the groove-shaped lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotating portion holder 287, and are formed on the rotating light unit cover 289. It can be attached by supporting the upper end of each of the groove-shaped lens support portion and the substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the revolving light unit cover 289 of the central revolving light unit 280 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting the LED of the cover decoration substrate 296.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the plate unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the plate unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the plate unit. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 42. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the dish unit with the dish back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the dish unit with the dish back plate and the ball rental unit removed. Further, FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. Further, FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit main body of the plate unit disassembled from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the back. Further, FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball pulling mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball pulling mechanism in the dish unit later. Further, FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit of the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit of the dish unit with the operation button unit substrate removed, and FIG. 54 is a bottom view of the dish. It is a bottom perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a unit from the bottom, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a dish unit by disassembling.

Further, FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is an exploded perspective view of the handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the ball launching device provided on the main body frame, and FIG. 61 is a perspective view. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects the handle device and the hitting ball launching device. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the plate unit, and FIG. 62 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of the game ball in the plate unit. Is. Further, FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long ball inflow port and the storage dish in the dish unit.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 described later, and the stored game balls are sent to the ball feed unit 170 via the ball feed unit 170 to be described later. Can be supplied to. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plate unit 300 covers the plate body 310 having a storage plate 311 whose upper and rear sides are open and capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls, and the front surface of the plate body 310. A first ball removing mechanism capable of discharging all the game balls stored in the plate unit main body 320, the plate-shaped plate back plate 340 covering the rear surfaces of the plate unit main body 320 and the plate body 310, and the storage plate 311 of the plate body 310. 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 that can discharge a part of the game balls stored in the storage dish of the dish 310, and a ball lending machine (CR unit) not shown adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The ball rental unit 301 that operates (referred to as), the operation button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the plate body 310 and can be operated by the player depending on the game state (game situation), and the plate unit main body 320 under the plate body 310. The lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 that is arranged between the plate back plate 340 and the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 and larger than the side speaker 121, and the front view right of the plate unit main body 320. It mainly includes a handle base 303 arranged in the lower corner and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for driving a game ball. Reference numeral 302 is a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination substrate 336 in the dish unit main body 320, which will be described later. Further, as shown in the drawing, a lower left decorative substrate 190 that emits and decorates the left end of the plate unit main body 320 is arranged on the left side of the plate back plate 340 in front view.

As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 301 in the plate unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the plate back plate 340 at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged next to the ball rental button 301a and the ball rental button 301a. It is provided with a loan balance indicator (not shown) arranged between the return button 301b and the ball lending button 301a and the return button 301b to display the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards on the ball lending machine. The ball lending unit 301 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 301a to release a predetermined number of game balls to the plate unit 300. You can rent (pay out) into the storage plate 311 of the machine, and when you press the return button 301b, the balance of the cash you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount and the prepaid card will be returned. There is.

Further, the main button 371 and the two sub-buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 of the plate unit 300 are used when a player participates in a game content (game production) performed by a liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like provided on the game board 4. It is something to operate.

[1-2C-1. Plate body]
First, as shown in the figure, the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300 occupies approximately two-thirds of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage dish 311 having a predetermined depth open upward and rearward, and a storage dish 311 inside the storage dish 311. The second ball outlet 312, which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c, which is continuous with the storage plate 311 from the right end of the storage plate 312, and the game ball can be distributed. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to substantially directly below the second ball extraction port 312, and the right side of the storage plate 311 are opened upward in a substantially rhombic shape for operation. The operation button unit mounting recess 314 to which the button unit 370 can be mounted and the first ball pulling button 351 of the first ball pulling mechanism 350 which opens in a substantially circular shape on the rear side of the operation button unit mounting recess 314 are mounted. It mainly includes a ball pulling button mounting port 315 and a first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 which is arranged substantially directly below the first ball pulling button mounting port 315 and supports the first ball pulling mechanism 350.

The storage dish 311 in the dish body 310 is arranged in front of the ball inflow port 341 of the dish back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a which is lowered toward the right side and the front side in a plan view and a right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear part of the portion and is lowered toward the right side and the rear side, and a third that is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and is lowered toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. A fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with the inclined surface 311c and the front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and the front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and becomes lower toward the right side and the second inclined surface 311b. It is provided with a fifth inclined surface 311e which is continuous with the right end portion of the four inclined surface 311d and becomes lower toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43, etc.).

Further, the storage plate 311 is arranged between the partition wall 311f, which rises upward from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e and the game ball cannot cross the border, and the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. It is further provided with a sixth inclined surface 311 g which becomes lower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the second ball removing port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removing shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360.

In the storage dish 311 of the present embodiment, as shown in a plan view, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) occupying approximately half the size of the storage dish 311. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagonal shape such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage dish 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) having a length in the left-right direction substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and shortening toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, after the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e extends from the left end to the right by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extends toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. It extends along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, and the front end (right end) extends rearward toward the right end of the rear end as a whole. It is formed in an inverted shape, and the partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end portion of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

Further, as shown in the figure, the storage dish 311 has a left side end portion and a front side end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front side end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front side end portion (right end portion) of the fifth inclined surface. ), The outer peripheral wall 311h is provided, and the storage dish 311 is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the dish body 310. Further, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage dish 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that moves forward toward the right at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball flowing from the ball inflow port 341 onto the first inclined surface 311a comes into contact with the position of the outer peripheral wall 311h facing the ball inflow port 341, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. It is designed to be distributed on the five inclined surfaces 311d. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope on which a game ball flowing into the storage plate 311 from the ball inflow inlet 341 can climb a slope, and the direction thereof is after climbing to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e. Is changed so that it flows down in the direction (left direction) of the fourth inclined surface 311d. That is, in the storage dish 311 of this example, the game ball flowing in from the ball inflow port 341 is once diverted to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flows into the third inclined surface 311c which is the supply path to the ball supply port 342. It has become like.

Further, the sixth inclined surface 311g of the storage plate 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls can be played on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side thereof. It is possible to facilitate the alignment in a row in the left-right direction toward the ball supply port 342. A stainless steel rail body 304 is mounted on the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the game balls in circulation and to dissipate static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage dish 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion thereof sneaks diagonally to the lower right and then hangs downward and the rear side is open. At the same time, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball removing path 313, and by being continuous with the first ball removing path 313, a flow path that is folded back in the left-right direction is formed. The boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313 is closed by the first ball removing slide 356 of the first ball removing mechanism 350, and the first ball removing is closed. The ball supply port 342 of the plate back plate 340 is opened as desired on the slide 356. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing down by the first ball removing slide 356, so that the game ball flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

In addition, in the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 310, the first ball is beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). The first ball, which will be described later, is on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313 with the slide groove 316a and the slide groove 316a inserted and arranged so that the pulling slide 356 can slide in the left-right direction. A hook portion 316b for locking the lower end portion of the pull-out spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Dish unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and the upper and rear sides are opened. It is provided with a box-shaped main body portion 321. The main body 321 has a shape in which about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward when viewed from the front, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulging portion. It has become. Further, the main body portion 321 has a speaker opening 321a and a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate the position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulging portion. The dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and the opening 321c for the second ball removing button formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate each other. Further, the main body portion 321 has an elliptical handle base mounting port 321d for mounting the handle base 303 in the lower right corner, and a locking opening 321e arranged above the handle base mounting port 321d and facing the cylinder lock 1010 described later. A ward-shaped duct opening 321f that opens on the right side of the portion that bulges forward on the left side of the handle base mounting port d, and a ward-shaped ball discharge port 321g that opens in the lower center in the left-right direction. I have.

Further, in the dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300, the front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body 321 from the front side and the speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 are passed through the main body 321. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punching metal and having four corners cut off, which is arranged on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and a plate-shaped right cover 323 which is arranged approximately in the center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been plated with, and plate-shaped right decoration 325 that is located approximately in the center of the front of the right decoration base 324 and is smaller than the right decoration base 324, and the main body of the front back plate 322. A plate-shaped left cover 326 made of punching metal and having four corners cut off, which is arranged on the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321 and a surface which is smaller than the left cover 326 and is arranged substantially in the center of the front surface of the left cover 326. A plate-shaped left decorative base 327 that has been plated with metallic luster, a plate-shaped left decorative base 328 that is located approximately in the center of the front of the left decorative base 327 and is smaller than the left decorative base 327, and a main body 321. Mainly includes a speaker opening 321a, a dummy opening 321b, and a frame-shaped front main body 329 that decorates the periphery of the second ball removal button opening 321c. The front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 is formed with a plurality of through holes 322a that penetrate the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 as desired, and these through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decorative base 323. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

Further, the dish unit main body 320 of this example has a main body left decorative base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190 and a metallic luster plated on the front surface of the main body left decorative base 330. It further includes a treated main body left decoration 331. The main body left decorative base 330 has translucency, and can be light-emitting decorated by the LED 190a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 arranged on the rear side of the main body left decorative base 330.

Further, the dish unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-shaped duct cover made of punching metal covering the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 and a duct notch 333a so that the duct cover faces from the surface. A main body right decoration 333, which covers the entire right side surface of the portion of the portion 321 that bulges forward and has a metallic luster plating treatment on the surface, is further provided.

Further, the dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and the main body upper decoration 334 having a metallic luster plating treatment on the surface thereof. An upper decorative lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a arranged in the main body 321 under the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decorative lens 335 arranged under the upper decorative lens 335. It is provided with a dish lighting substrate 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted on the upper surface. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination substrate 336, the upper edge of the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be light-emitting and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Plate back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plate back plate 340 in the plate unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape as a whole, is arranged in the upper left corner in a front view, and has a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inflow port 341 penetrating into the ball inflow port 341, a ball supply port 342 arranged at a predetermined distance in the lower right direction from the ball inflow port 341 and penetrating in a ward shape through which a game ball can pass, and a ball inflow port 341 communicating with the rear It mainly has a square tubular prize ball connecting gutter 343 that extends to. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the ball inflow port 341 of the plate back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage plate 311 of the plate body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage plate 311. It is said to be about the same length as the length of. Further, the ball supply port 342 is arranged at the right end of the third inclined surface 331c in the storage dish 311 at a position corresponding to the first ball removing slide 356 of the first ball removing mechanism 350. Further, the prize ball connecting gutter 343 is arranged at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inflow port 341, and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inflow port 341. The length is set so that the rear end penetrates the prize ball passage port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with the outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guidance passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. ..

Further, the plate back plate 340 is arranged at a position where the front end of the prize ball connecting gutter 343 is reserved by a predetermined amount behind the ball inflow port 341, and is located between the ball inflow port 341 and the prize ball connecting gutter 343. Further, it has a shelf portion 344 extending over the entire length of the ball inflow port 341 in the left-right direction and through which game balls can be distributed. The shelf portion 344 allows the game balls that have been distributed through the prize ball connecting gutter 343 to flow in to the downstream side of the second ball outlet 312 of the storage plate 311.

Further, the back plate 340 corresponds to the ball pulling path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later and penetrates in a substantially L shape, and the ball flow at the upper left of the front view of the ball pulling path opening 345 and the ball pulling path opening 345. A latch opening 346 that is arranged below the inlet 341 (second ball extraction port 312 in the dish body 310) and penetrates into a section shape through which the rear end of the latch unit 366 of the second ball extraction mechanism 360 described later is inserted. , The wiring insertion port 347, which is arranged in the upper right corner of the front view and penetrates into a substantially section shape, and the ball rental unit 301, which is arranged on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inflow port 341 and the wiring insertion port 346, are attached. It is provided with a ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 44, 45, 50, etc., the first ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 presses the first ball removing button 351 and the first ball removing button 351 operated by the player. The first ball pulling button base 352, which is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side into the first ball pulling button mounting port 315 of the dish body 310, and the dish on the upper part of the first ball pulling button base 352. Supported by a first ball pulling button decorative body 353 in which the first ball pulling button 351 is fixed so as to project upward with the body 310 sandwiched between the first ball pulling button decorative body 353 and the first ball pulling button base 352. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351 and the rotating shaft. An inverted L-shaped first ball pulling crank 355, which is rotatably supported by 354 and has one end in contact with the lower end of the first ball pulling button 351 and the other end extending downward, and a first ball pulling crank. It is made able to come into contact with the lower end of the other end side of the 355 and is slidably supported by the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 in substantially the left-right direction, and is supported by the third inclined surface 311c of the dish body 310 and the first It is provided with a first ball removing slide 356 capable of closing the boundary portion with the ball removing path 313, and a first ball removing spring 357 for urging the first ball removing crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction. ..

The first ball pulling slide 356 of the first ball pulling mechanism 350 can be slid in the left-right direction by being inserted and arranged in the slide groove 316a of the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 in the dish body 310. In this state, the first ball removing crank 355 rotates so that the first ball removing crank 355 can be slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side. By sliding the first ball pulling slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip portion of the first ball pulling slide 356 can move back and forth in the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c of the dish body 310 and the first ball pulling path 313. When the flow path is closed by advancing to the boundary portion, the game ball that has flowed through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retracted from the boundary portion. When opened, the game balls that have circulated on the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removing path 313 side.

Further, the first ball pulling crank 355 is locked with the upper end portion of the first ball pulling spring 357 on the side opposite to the one end side that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the first ball pulling button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. The hook portion 355a is formed. The upper end of the first ball pulling spring 357 is engaged with the hook portion 355a of the first ball pulling crank 355, and the lower end thereof is engaged with the hook portion 316b of the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 310. By stopping, the first ball pulling crank 355 is closed, the position where the first ball pulling slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313, and the first ball pulling button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

In this first ball pulling mechanism 350, when the first ball pulling button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball pulling crank 355 passes through the contact pin 355b that comes into contact with the lower end of the first ball pulling button 351. Rotates in a direction in which one end side moves downward against the urging force of the first ball pulling spring 357, and the other end side moves away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball pulling slide 356 moves together with the lower end of the first ball pulling crank 355 in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313, and the tip of the first ball pulling slide 356 Retreats from the flow path of the boundary portion and the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313 communicate with each other, and the third inclined surface 311c, that is, all the game balls in the storage dish 311 are used as the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside via the punching path 313.

When the pressing of the first ball removing button 351 is released, the first ball removing crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removing spring 357, the first ball removing button 351 is raised, and the first ball is raised. The tip of the drawing slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (inside the storage dish 311). The game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball pulling mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball protruding forward from the opening 321c for the second ball pulling button of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320. The front and rear of the second ball pulling slide 362 and the second ball pulling slide 362, in which the pulling button 361 and the second ball pulling button 361 are fitted and fixed to the tip and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by the lower speaker unit 390 described later. The rod-shaped second ball-extracting crank 363, which transmits the movement in the direction and is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the left-right direction by the lower speaker unit 390, and the dish body 310 by rotating the second ball-extracting crank 363. A second ball pulling shutter 364 that can rotate around an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position that closes the second ball pulling port 312 and an open position that opens the second ball pulling port 312, and a second The second ball pulling spring 365 that urges the ball pulling shutter 364 to the closed position where the second ball pulling port 312 is closed, and the second ball pulling shutter 364 that opposes the urging force of the second ball pulling spring 365. It has a latch unit 366 that can be held in a position, an opening 367a that slidably supports the lower surface of the second ball extraction shutter 364 and corresponds to the second ball extraction port 312, and is fixed to the lower side of the dish 310. The second ball pulling base 367 and the rear end of the second ball pulling slide 362 are slidably held and the latch unit 366 is supported, and the second ball is pulled out in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later. It includes a second ball pulling mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that rotatably supports the ball pulling crank 363.

The second ball pulling slide 362 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end and the lower end of the second ball pulling crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end. It is provided with an engaging claw 366a of the latch unit 366 and an engaging protrusion 362b that can be engaged. Further, the second ball removing crank 363 is a rod-shaped member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removing slide 362 from above and is substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is rotatably supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390. Thus, when the second ball removing slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 moves along with the sliding of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removing crank 363 rotates. , The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end portion.

Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removing shutter 364 is arranged above the second ball removing slide 362, and opens the second ball removing port 312 of the dish 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removing base 367. A semicircular (D-shaped) plate-shaped closing portion 364a that can be closed, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod extending from the closing portion 364a in one of the left-right directions (leftward in front view, rightward in FIG. 51). It has 364b and is formed in a substantially P shape as a whole. Further, in the second ball removing shutter 364, the tip of the paddle portion 364b is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction by the dish body 310 and the second ball removing base 367, and the paddle portion 364b is provided. The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially intermediate portion in the left-right direction on the rear side. Further, the front end portion of the second ball removing spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the paddle portion 364b in the second ball removing shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end of the second ball pulling spring 365 is locked to a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball pulling spring 365 As a result, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removing shutter 364 is urged to be in the closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removing port 312.

Further, in the second ball removing base 367 of the second ball removing mechanism 360, the upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 can pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removing shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball pulling crank 363 pivotally supported on the lower side of the second ball pulling base 367 via the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball pulling base 367. It is possible to come into contact with the sill portion 364b of the second ball removing shutter 364 arranged in. As shown in the figure, the second ball removing base 367 is formed in a shallow dish shape, and the dish body 310 can form a storage space for accommodating the second ball removing shutter 364. There is. Further, the height of the accommodating space for accommodating the second ball removing shutter 364 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball and is lower than the outer diameter of the game ball. Even if is in the open state, the game ball does not enter between the dish body 310 and the second ball removing base 367.

In the second ball pulling mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball pulling button 361 protruding forward from the front surface of the plate unit main body 320, the second ball pulling slide 362 slides backward and the second ball pulling mechanism 360 Guided by the transmission groove 362a of the two-ball pulling slide 362, the second ball pulling crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball pulling crank 363 moves rearward. Then, when the second ball removing crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removing shutter 364 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363. However, the closing portion 364a rotates about the tip of the paddle portion 364b so as to move forward against the urging force of the second ball pulling spring 365. When the closing portion 364a moves forward in this way and the opening 367a of the second ball pulling port 312 of the dish body 310 and the second ball pulling base 367 is opened, the second ball pulling port 312 of the storage dish 311 is opened. The game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

The second ball pulling mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the engaging protrusions 362b at the rear end of the second ball pulling slide 362 are paired in the latch unit 366 by pressing the second ball pulling button 361. When they come into contact with each other, the pair of engaging claws 366a close and engage with each other so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball is pulled out against the urging force of the second ball pulling spring 365. The button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball extraction port 312 can be held in the open (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364. When the second ball pulling button 361 is pressed in this state, the pair of engaging claws 366a of the latch unit 366 is opened, the engagement with the engaging protrusion 362b is released, and the urging force of the second ball pulling spring 365 causes the second ball pulling spring 365 to release the engagement. The closing portion 364a of the second ball removing shutter 364 can return to the position where the second ball removing port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 55, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above with respect to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300. A pair consisting of an octagonal main button 371 with the four corners cut off in a plan view, and a home base-shaped left sub button 372L and a right sub button 372R arranged symmetrically on both the left and right sides of the main button 371 in a plan view. The operation button unit base 373 and the operation button unit base 373 that hold the sub button 372, the main button 371, and the sub button 372 in a slidable manner in the vertical direction and are inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310. A plate-shaped operation button unit decorative member 374 that decorates the upper surface, an operation button unit board 375 that is fixed to the lower side of the operation button unit base 373 and has a plurality of color LEDs 375a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation button unit base 373 to illuminate and decorate the operation button unit 370. It has.

Further, the operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects the operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects the operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects the operation of the right sub button 372R. It further includes a button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and are fixed at predetermined positions on the operation button unit board 375, respectively. ..

As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 of the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombic shape in a plan view, and has a main button accommodating recess 373a capable of accommodating the main button 371 from above, and a main button accommodating portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b formed on the inner peripheral surface and extending in the vertical direction with the upper side open to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed on the bottom surface of the main button accommodating recess 373a. A plurality of light guide openings 373d, which are opened along the outer circumference of the main button accommodating recess 373a with a predetermined width and guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 arranged on the lower side to the upper surface side, and a sub. A pair of sub-button accommodating recesses 373e capable of accommodating the button 372 from above, a screw insertion hole 373f formed in the diagonal upper corner of the long axis, and a plate-shaped top plate portion forming the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373. It mainly includes 373 g and a plate-shaped side wall portion 373 h that hangs down from the lower surface along the outer circumference of the top plate portion 373 g so as to surround the outer periphery.

The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape with an open lower surface by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h, and a plurality of main button accommodating recesses 373a (main button accommodating recesses 373a) are formed at predetermined positions of the top plate portion 373g. Here, eight) light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened, respectively. Further, in the operation button unit base 373, the main button accommodating recess 373a is formed to have a thick thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are enhanced. At the same time, each of the light guide openings 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button accommodating recess 373a is formed in a long tubular shape in the vertical direction, and the outer peripheral wall of these tubular light guide openings 373d also forms. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 is a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency and the main button lens 371a that is open up and down. A vibrating body holder that wraps the main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c arranged under the main button base 371b, and the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via a mounting screw 371d. It is equipped with 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 abuts on the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end abuts on the bottom surface of the main button accommodating recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. It is equipped with a main button spring that urges the 371 to rise.

The main button lens 371a in the main button 371 has an octagonal plan view and is formed in a box shape with an open lower surface, and has a smooth shape on the front surface side, whereas a plurality of small lenses on the back surface side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be widely diffused so that the entire surface of the main button 370 can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly.

Further, as shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal shape similar to that of the main button lens 371 on the upper end side, whereas the lower end side is narrowed downward from the substantially middle portion in the vertical direction. It has a shape, and the lower end extends downward from the opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button accommodating recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, and is directly above the LED 375a group arranged in the center of the operation button unit board 375. It is designed to be located in. Further, the main button base 371b has a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposing sides and a plurality of vertically extending guide protrusions inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. With 371 g. The main locking claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to the locking portion (not shown) in the main button accommodating recess 373a of the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 becomes the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from coming out due to the urging force of.

Further, the main button base 371b is designed so that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of one of the main locking claws 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and the portion where the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

In the main button 371 of this example, when the main button 371 is pushed downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371h of the main button base 371b is placed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the main button sensor 376. The operation is detected by the main button sensor 376 after entering. Further, when the operation of the main button 371 is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the operation of the vibrating body 371c causes the main button 371 to vibrate, thereby causing the player to operate. It is possible to recognize that the operation of the main button 371 is being accepted, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the main button 371. A light-shielding plate 375b is attached to the operation button unit board 375 to prevent the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to the light from the mounted LED 375a.

Further, the sub-button 372 of the operation button unit 370 supports a sub-button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right-angled triangular shape and translucency in a plan view and a sub-button lens 372a in a plan view on a home base-like upper surface. The sub button base 372b housed in the sub button housing recess 373e in the operation button unit base 373 from above, and the sub button base 372b and the bottom surface of the sub button housing recess 373e are arranged below the sub button lens 372a. It includes a sub-button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b in a rising direction. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs downward from the front and rear of the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall portion 372e that hangs downward from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

The sub-button 372 has a sub-locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub-button accommodating recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. By locking the 372d to the locking portion, it is possible to prevent the sub button 372 from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e due to the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

Further, as shown in the figure, the operation button unit decorative member 374 of the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombic shape in a plan view and is formed in a plate shape, and the main button lens 371a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372. An opening 374a through which the sub-button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. .. Further, a mounting hole 374c (not shown) through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted is bored in the diagonally upper corner of the long axis, and is inserted through the mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373. The operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed to the dish 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw hiding 378 that hides the two mounting holes 374c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decorative member 374.

In the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, as described above, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple tubular shape by the main button accommodating recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall portion 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are increased, the operation button unit 370 is less likely to be damaged even if it is strongly operated by hitting the main button 371 or the like. Further, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 from above, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctions, it should occur. , The dish body 310 can be easily attached and detached from above and replaced. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (mounted) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later via the dish body 310, the impact resistance and the load capacity from the main button 371 and the like are supported. The property is further enhanced, and not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is less likely to be damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 has a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 and a lower portion. It mainly includes a box-shaped speaker box 392 that holds the speaker 391 at a position closer to the front right side in the front view and at a position behind the speaker opening 321a of the main body portion 321 of the dish unit main body 320. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the opening 392a, and can emit deeper bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. You can do it.

The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 due to the vibration of the lower speaker 391 is generated. It goes in and out through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 421 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400, and the operation handle. The air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 can be applied to the hand of the player who operates the unit 410, giving the player an unprecedented feel and entertaining. There is. By sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and the combination with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371 can be applied. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the tactile effect that has not been seen in conventional game machines.

Further, the speaker box 392 is arranged on the rear surface downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction port 312 of the dish body 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction port 312. It is provided with a ball removal path 393 that guides the game ball that has been played to the lower part of the speaker box 392 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. The ball pulling path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 is formed through the ball pulling path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by the ball pulling path cover 191 that closes the ball pulling path opening 111 of 110. Further, the game balls circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged downward from the dish unit 300 from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 of the dish unit main body 320.

Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball pulling slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball pulling slide 362 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction on the upper left side when viewed from the front. It is provided with a second ball pulling mechanism support portion 395 which is arranged behind the two ball pulling slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball pulling mechanism support 368 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360. The second ball pulling mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball pulling slide holding hole 394 and the second ball pulling mechanism support portion 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 has an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side and a door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. It is composed of a joint unit 180 that is assembled on the back surface of the door and is linked with a rotary shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotary operation of the operation handle portion 410 and that changes the rotary motion of the rotary shaft 415 into a slide motion.

First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support cylinder portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 that is attached so as to project forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. It is inserted and fixed in 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined toward the outside (right side) in a plan view of the pachinko machine 1 from above, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed in the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame. It will be attached and fixed to 5. As described above, by inclining the operation handle portion 410 toward the outside in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grip the operation handle portion 410, and the rotation operation is easy to perform without any discomfort. Then, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is tilted and installed, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the elastic force of the ball launching device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After inserting the operation handle portion 410 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a, the handle support cylinder portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (to be exact, the rear grip member 413) are connected by a screw or the like to form the operation handle portion 410. It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder portion 303a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is rotatably pivotally supported between the front grip member 412, the rear grip member 413, the front grip member 412, and the rear grip member 413. It is composed of an operating member 414, a linear cylindrical rotating shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotating operating member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotating shaft 415. In the rear grip member 413, a small diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large diameter portion in front of the small diameter portion are integrally formed, and a shaft through hole 418 through which the rotating shaft 415 penetrates is formed in the center thereof. It is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted through the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 penetrated through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 penetrates the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 fixed to the front side of the rear grip member 413 and penetrates the rotation operating member 414. It is fitted into the shaft fitting hole 426 formed in the center.

Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, protrusions and mounting holes (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the launch stop switch 422 are provided, and the single-shot button 421 is swingably supported. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a launch stop switch 422, and a single-shot button 421 are mounted on the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pin. Then, the wiring through hole 419 having the wiring through hole 419 formed on the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 is gathered together with the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in the state where they are attached. It is led to the back surface of the door frame 5 from the portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operating member 414 so as to be provided around the rotating shaft 415, and the urging spring 425 is always based on the rotation operating member 414. It is designed to return to the position of. Further, when the switch contact convex portion 427 is projected from the outside of the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414 and the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 425, the switch contact. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the launch stop switch 422 to turn off the launch stop switch 422, and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the launch stop switch 422. Separate and turn it on. Further, since the single-shot button 421 can swing while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single-shot button 421. ing.

The outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 to turn on the launch stop switch 422 and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, the launch motor 695 described later of the ball launching device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

Further, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a ball shape, and the cam contact of the slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The portion 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. Then, in the present embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is tilted in a plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back surface side of the door frame 5. As a result, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip end portion of the rotating shaft 415 is housed in the cam engaging recess 182c of the slide body 182. In this case, since the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined shape in a plan view, the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since it has a space width, the entire inclined cam 416 can be stored in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the center of rotation of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the magatama-shaped cam 416 is below the cam engaging recess 182c. It is designed to be located in the space.

When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the above-mentioned state, the rotation shaft 415 rotates, and the cam 416 rotates accordingly. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (B). The slide body 182 is moved in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, the right side in the drawing) due to the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engaging recess 182c and the one-side outer surface (outer surface in front of rotation) of the cam 416. Slide to move. That is, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 is converted into the slide movement of the slide body 182. Therefore, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 and the end edge of the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 in the traveling direction in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. 59 (A) is the maximum of the cam 416. Due to the rotation, the distance S2 becomes larger than the distance S1. That is, the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 slides by the distance of "S2-S1". Then, as shown in FIGS. 57, 60, and 61, the slide movement of the slide projecting piece 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball launching device 650, and the urging spring 684 of the ball launching device 650 ( The tension of (see FIG. 91) can be adjusted, and the strength of the urging force of the hitting mallet 687 can be adjusted to obtain the elastic force of the hitting ball desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball launching device 650 will be described in detail after the description of the ball launching device 650.

The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle portion 410 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through cylinder portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c to the back surface of the door frame 5 is on the shaft support side along the lower side of the back surface of the door frame 5. After that, it is connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 which is collectively mounted on the board unit 1100 mounted on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. ..

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball in the storage dish 311 of the dish unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flow into the storage plate 311 from the ball inflow port 341 via the prize ball communication gutter 343 of the full tank unit 900 and the back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed in from the ball inflow port 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side in the front view are lowered, and the game ball flowing into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inflow port 341 is along the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. It comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inflow port 341 of the outer peripheral wall 311h surrounding the front outer circumference of the storage dish 311. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 in which the ball inflow port 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h is to the right in the front view. It is designed to reflect.

Then, the game ball that flows into the storage dish 311 from the ball inflow port 341 and reflects to the right on the outer peripheral wall 311h crosses the fourth inclined surface 311d and enters the fifth inclined surface 311e. The fifth inclined surface 311e has a lower left side in front view, that is, the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb a slope. The game ball that has entered from the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d is distributed to the upper part of the fifth inclined surface 311e (the right end in the plan view) while climbing the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side around the right end portion by an outer peripheral wall 311h and a partition wall 311f, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e is around it. It goes around the inside of the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to substantially follow the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f surrounding the above, and returns to the fourth inclined surface 311d side arranged on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

The game ball that has entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e circulates to the second inclined surface 311b behind the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further, the second It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the third inclined surface 311c on the right side, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 arranged at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage dish 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not directly go from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. After entering the fifth inclined surface 311e through the fourth inclined surface 311d, it reaches the third inclined surface 311c through the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b, and reaches the ball flow inlet. It is possible to bypass the game ball that has flowed in from 341.

As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored by effectively using the entire storage plate 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage like a conventional pachinko machine, and the game balls block the ball inflow port 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is activated, the payout of the game ball is stopped, or the launching operation of the game ball by the ball launcher 650 is stopped, and the game is interrupted. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

By the way, since many game balls are stored in the storage plate 311 of the plate unit 300 of this example, the ball inflow port 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and the prize ball communication trough 343 and the prize of the plate back plate 340 are awarded. When a game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 arranged between the ball unit 800, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is activated to stop the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800. , The firing operation of the game ball in the ball launching device 650 is stopped, and especially when the launching operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game must be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the plate 311 becomes appropriate, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361 are operated to place the game balls from the storage plate 311 below the plate unit 300 (a container ( For example, it needs to be discharged to a dollar box). In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is activated, the player is informed that the storage plate 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

To eject the game ball from the storage plate 311 by operating (pressing) the first ball extraction button 351 arranged on the upper surface of the plate unit 300, the first ball extraction slide 356 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 is operated. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313, causing the game ball of the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removing path 313, and the ball. It is possible to discharge the ball from the ball discharge port 321 g to the lower side of the dish unit 300 via the punching path 393. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be pulled out from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c, which is the lowest position in the storage plate 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage plate 311. You can do it. However, in ball pulling by operating the first ball pulling button 351, there is a problem that it takes time to pull the ball because the game balls are arranged in a row on the third inclined surface 311c.

Then, when the second ball removing button 361 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removing shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 moves and the second in the storage dish 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312, and the dish unit from the ball discharge port 321 g via the ball extraction path 393. It can be discharged downward of 300 (see FIG. 62 (B)). As shown in the figure, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at one time. Therefore, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time required for ball removal. In addition, if a big hit occurs during the game, a large amount of balls will be paid out to the plate unit 300, and if this is left unattended and the game is continued, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the plate unit 300 (FIG. There is a risk that the function of (see 111) will be activated and the payout operation will be stopped, or the firing operation will be stopped and the game will not be able to continue even though the hitting operation of the game ball is stopped and the game cannot be continued. In such a case, by operating the second ball pulling button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is pulled out, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game during the big hit. Can be continued.

Further, in the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removing button 361 is operated, the second ball removing shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removing mechanism 360, and the second ball removing port is opened. The 312 can be left open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and the game balls on the first inclined surface 311a are almost eliminated, the game balls flowing in from the ball inflow port 341 are as described above. , Reflected by the outer peripheral wall 311h and tried to circulate in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the second inclined surface 311b on the downstream side of the second ball outlet 312. A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launching operation of the ball launching device 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage plate 311 from the ball inflow port 341, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and if the launching operation of the game ball is stopped and the number of inflowing game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, even if the second ball outlet 312 is left open, it is possible to always secure a certain amount of game balls in the storage plate 311 and continue the game. ing. That is, even in a state where the payout of the game balls is continuous, such as during the big hit game, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of the game balls in the storage plate 311.

In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the bottom surface of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 is the front surface of the first inclined surface 311a, the second inclined surface 311b, and the third inclined surface 311c. The ball inflow port 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape that extends substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower in the visual direction toward the right (ball supply port 342). Therefore, it is probable that a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage dish 311 and the bottom surface of the ball inflow port 341, and the step becomes larger toward the right side in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage dish 311 and the bottom of the ball inflow port 341 is almost the same at the left end of the ball inflow port 341, and at the right end of the ball inflow port 341 from the outer diameter of the game ball. Is also a slightly higher step. As a result, the game ball that has flowed in in the front-rear direction substantially straight through the prize ball connecting gutter 343 flows into the storage plate 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inflow port 341 with few steps toward the center. Therefore, since the step is small, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inflow port 341 to the storage plate 311 is also small, and the load applied to the storage plate 311 is reduced and the storage plate 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage plate 311 increases and a large number of game balls are also stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 via the prize ball connecting gutter 343 The game balls flowing into the storage plate 311 are shaped like pushing the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 from the side, and the game balls are pushed against each other by the lateral force acting on each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game ball in the storage dish 311 (third inclined surface 311c) is consumed through the ball supply port 342, the game ball is consumed in the vicinity of the upstream of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other to reduce the fluidity of the game balls and cause ball clogging. However, in this example, as described above, the ball inflow port 341 moves in the left-right direction. Since it has an extended rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball connecting gutter 343 can directly flow into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf portion 344, and the game ball can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62 (B)).

Further, in the portion on the right side of the center of the ball inflow port 341 in the left-right direction, the lower side of the ball inflow port 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage plate 311. The game balls that flow into the storage plate 311 will flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage plate 311, and the game balls will be prevented from pushing each other in the lateral direction to increase the fluidity of the game balls. It is possible to prevent it from lowering, and the game ball flowing in from above promotes the movement of the lower game ball (particularly the game ball in contact with the front surface of the plate back plate 340) in the lateral direction, which naturally occurs. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging (see FIG. 63).

As described above, in the storage plate 300 of this example, even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage plate 311 is large, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 can be stored on the shelf of the horizontally long ball inflow port 341. Since the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 are allowed to flow to the upper side via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from being clogged in the storage plate 311 and store the game balls. It is possible to continue the game without worrying about the game ball in the plate 311 and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit disassembled from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the figure, the glass unit 450 has an opening larger than that of the game window 101 and closes an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 451 molded from synthetic resin and the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 451. It includes a transparent glass plate 452 and a strip-shaped glass decorative substrate 453 arranged between the two glass plates 452 along the inner circumference of the unit frame 451.

The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a whose rear side is opened and a glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b which are opened from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 substantially in the center in the front-rear direction, a terminal plate support portion 451d projecting from the upper left end to the left in front view, and an outer circumference upward from the center in the vertical direction. It includes a stopper piece 451e that projects from the position in the left-right direction, and a locking projection 451f that projects outward from both ends of the lower side in the left-right direction.

Further, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-shaped and has flexibility, and a plurality of color LEDs 453a are located on the surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451) at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451. Is mounted, and when the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

Further, the glass unit 450 has a glass decorative relay terminal plate 454 connected to the glass decorative substrate and supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 and an end portion of the glass decorative substrate 453 fixed to the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454. Further includes a substrate retainer 455 and a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are adhesively fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451. In this glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertically bent projecting piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e and The locking projection 451f is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. ..

Further, the glass unit 450 is capable of emitting and decorating between two glass plates 452 by appropriately emitting light from the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453, and has an atmosphere different from that of conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to use a pachinko machine 1 having a game window 101 (with a mood).

[1-2E. Security cover]
Subsequently, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 has a security function of covering the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing sheet metals 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. Along with the contact recess 471, a crime prevention rear projection piece 474 is projected rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, with the security cover 470 attached, a security rear end projecting piece 475 is obliquely formed on the back surface on the shaft support side. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 470, a security front projecting piece 472 is projected along the downward shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 with the security cover 470 attached, and is U-shaped at both lower ends. The mounting elastic piece 473 to be formed is formed so as to project forward.

The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5 by attaching the attachment elastic piece 473 to the attachment opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. In the attached state, although not shown, the crime prevention front projecting piece 472 faces the rear lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front projecting piece 472 is in contact with the vertical bent projecting piece 151. Further, the crime prevention rear projection piece 474 and the security rear end projection piece 475 are in a state of projecting rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, half of the crime prevention rear projection piece 474 on the shaft support side is The lower side surface of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 is invaded and faced with each other, but the open side half of the rear projection piece 474 is the rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601. It is in a state of being inserted into the groove 607, and the security rear end projecting piece 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the security protrusion 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

Thus, when the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame projecting piece 110d and the engaging grooves 584,585 described above, and the security projecting piece 166 and the security space 586 described later are provided. In addition to the security structure by the above, even if an attempt is made to invade a fraudulent tool from below the glass unit 450, the fraudulent tool invades from the lower front direction of the security cover 470 due to the overlap of the security front protrusion 472 and the unit frame 451. The crime prevention rear projection piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are overlapped to prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the lower rear surface of the crime prevention cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of the illegal tool from diagonally below the shaft support side of the door frame 5, the intrusion of the illegal tool into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the overlapping structure of the security protrusion 608 and the security rear end projecting piece 475. Further, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the crime prevention post-projection piece 474 makes it possible to prevent the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game area 605 of the game board 4.

Similarly, in addition to the security structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 143, the security structure against the intrusion of illegal tools from diagonally below the opening side of the door frame 5 is added. The uneven engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the security rear projection piece 474 can further prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. The vertical surface between the security rear projection piece 474 and the security rear end projection piece 475 on the back surface side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide passage of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball from colliding with the glass plate 452 of the hit ball that is sent back or forth in the guide passage portion.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. FIG. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. It is a side view of 500, FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of a state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. Is a perspective view seen from the back surface of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached, and FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along the horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 part). ..

The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment can be detachably attached to the game board 4 from the front side, and has a ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for paying out prize balls, a tank rail member 740, and a ball passage unit. The 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the locking device 1000 that locks the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame excluding the game board 4. Various parts such as a board unit 1100 in which various control boards and power supply boards 1136 for controlling electrical parts provided in 3 are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 covering the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-mentioned various parts are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which various parts are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both refer to FIG. 71) for supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 with an opening / closing shaft are attached to the upper and lower sides of the main body frame main body 500. When the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 are attached to the shaft support bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially the same plane as the upper side and the side side of the upper shaft support bracket 503, and the lower side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially the same plane as the lower side and the side side of the lower shaft support metal fitting 509 (FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft support fitting 503 and the lower shaft support fitting 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support bracket 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end side protrudes forward, and a shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward thereof, and the shaft support pin 504 is fixed. A door shaft support hole 505 is bored on the side.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly upper portion thereof. The support plate 506 located below constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 to the lower support metal fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the support plate 507 located above constitutes the door frame 5. It constitutes a door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft branch 148 to the main body frame 3. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower shaft support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the protruding shaft pin 147 is bored.

By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper portion thereof becomes a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. The plate portion 511 is a slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510. Further, the front upper side portion and the front open side side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the back surface of the door frame 5, and the front upper side portion has a predetermined width. An upper security double groove 581 is formed by protrusions projecting in parallel in the lateral direction, and a side security groove 582 is formed on the outside and inside on the front open side on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 formed by an inner wall whose rear end is an inclined surface connected to the first side wall 540 is formed, and the front shaft support side side on the left side when viewed from the front is a front upper side or a front open. Unlike the side side portion, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width facing the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side portion of the main body frame main body 500 is forward compared to the front upper side portion and the front open side surface portion. It is a shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) having a large amount of protrusion.

More specifically, the upper security double groove 581 formed on the upper front side is bent rearward at both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the back surface of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent project pieces 155 and 156 are inserted, respectively. Further, the side security groove 582 and the security recess 583 formed on the front opening side side are folded rearward at both long side ends of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 143 which is attached and fixed to the back surface of the opening portion of the door frame 5. The open side outer bent projectile piece 153 and the open side inner bent projecting piece 154 to be bent are inserted respectively. Further, the tip of the shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 which is attached and fixed to the shaft support side back surface of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side side portion. The parts are in contact with each other.

The structure described above can prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a piano wire or other fraudulent tool through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where fraudulent acts are most likely to occur. The structure is such that it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities in the peripheral areas and the upper areas where fraudulent activities are likely to occur. Of course, the prevention of fraudulent activity due to the contact between the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the shaft support side and the L-shaped bent projectile piece 157 on the shaft support side also works well, but in many cases, the shaft support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected by the support metal fittings 45 and 66 and the shaft support metal fittings 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is compared with that of the upper side portion and the open side portion. It is difficult to make a gap in the door. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a single security structure is used instead of a double security structure. These points will be described in detail later.

Further, in addition to the above configurations, the front upper side portion, the front open side side portion, and the front shaft support side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are provided on the upper, middle, and lower portions of the front open side side portion. A door hook hole 549 is provided to penetrate the door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in the lock device 1000 to be attached to the open side back surface of the main body frame 3 and to project forward. Further, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with the positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner surface of the front shaft support side side portion. Further, on the inner front surface slightly below the board positioning protrusion 576 on the front shaft support side side, the shaft support side L-shaped bent projectile 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed. Two upper and lower regulation protrusions 577 into which the tip is inserted are projected. The action of the regulation protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole in which the end portion of the game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the flat portion on the open side and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board mounting portion 512 for mounting the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is mounted in the substantially center of the game board mounting portion 512, the game board is mounted. A passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in 4 is provided so as to project. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, rail mounting bosses 514 project from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end portion on the open side at predetermined intervals, and the launch rail 515 ( (See FIG. 71) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connecting member 516 is projected from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is installed. It is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76), which is the downstream end of the 603.

Further, at the lateral position of the rail connecting member 516 (the position opposite to the launch rail 515), the upper end portion of the elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower portion of the game board 4. A fixture mounting boss 517 for mounting the fixture is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally downward thereof. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotatably provided around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates clockwise with the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 512. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, the game board fixture 519 can be easily removed by turning it counterclockwise. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from rotating excessively in the counterclockwise direction by the stopper 518.

Further, the lower portion of the plate portion 511 on the open side is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launcher mounting portion 520 that protrudes toward the front side (concave when viewed from the back surface). A ball launching device 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This point will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 in which a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) linked with the slide projecting piece 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is housed is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 facing the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball hammer 687 is provided at a position adjacent to the handle connecting window 522. Further, a mallet penetrating opening 521 for projecting the hammer 687 of the ball launching device 650 upward is formed in the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520, and a plate portion 511 diagonally above the mallet penetrating opening 521 is formed. A cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 penetrates is provided on the front surface of the lock device 1000.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 68, a ball ejection discharge passage 524 extending downward from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 is formed. .. The ball removal discharge passage 524 is for discharging the balls discharged from the ball removal connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the inside of the island. Further, a columnar guide protrusion 525 is projected rearward above the launcher mounting portion 520 described above, and the guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is provided in the guide protrusion 525. It is plugged in to facilitate mounting of the board unit 1100. Further, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left, right, top and bottom of the plate portion 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are associated with the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. Further, a launcher mounting boss 529 for mounting the ball launching device 650 is projected rearward inside the concave portion of the launcher mounting portion 520, and further, the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. 70. As shown, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide projecting piece having a tapered tip and a vertically long shape in order to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 is projected backward.

In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball ejection connection opening 530, which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 524, on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. .. The downstream end of the ball ejection connection passage 880 is connected to the ball ejection connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball ejection connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full tank unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full tank unit 900 (see FIG. 71) described in detail later is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engaging groove 532 is formed in the front portion of the full tank unit mounting portion 531 to engage with the engaging piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full tank unit mounting portion 531 is an outlet for blocking the prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened. A switchgear 579 is provided.

Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 will not be described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by the lever that abuts on the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the opening / closing plate rises to block the outlet 921 because the contact with the lever is lost. Therefore, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not spill from the outlet 921. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole which is a game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 and which penetrates in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the upper part of the launch portion of the launch rail 515. A fastening rail 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 is provided to form the 533. The fastening connecting rod 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3.

Next, the configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around the first side wall 540 that is circulated rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the above-mentioned upper side portion and the flange surface portion on the open side, and circulates rearward from the first side surface wall 540. The main body frame 3 is formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 circling rearward from the second side wall 541, and the fourth side wall 543 circling rearward from the third side wall 542. It is formed in a concave shape in which the left and right side sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded.

The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed so that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are extended straight backward with a step when viewed from the back surface, whereas the left side (the side on the shaft support side) is formed. The side on the open side) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 75) that inclines inward from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is the rearmost end portion of the fourth side wall 543 when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (open side side) is formed straight rearward. May not be able to be opened smoothly because it comes into contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the opening side are inclined inward to open smoothly. It is something that can be done.

At the same time, the lock device 1000 is mounted along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the lock device 1000 is mounted by using the lock mounting hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided at the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side are formed in an inclined stepped shape. Further, as for the dimension of the step between the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. Therefore, it is formed with a large step to some extent, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be continuously formed without forming a step.

As shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 described above are formed so as to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in the case of the present embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. .. In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543. The rear protruding portion of various gaming devices provided in No. 4 is accommodated.

That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having substantially the same depth dimension as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side walls 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back surface of the peripheral portion of the game board 4. A rear side wall having a stepped portion in contact and extending rearward from the first side wall 540 substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and accommodating a rear protruding portion of a game device provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the amount of protrusion of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 to the rear is fixed to the upper part on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. The prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to be substantially at the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls.

As a result, the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, so that, for example, a game Even when a game device such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4 is attached, the rear protruding portion of the game device can be easily stored.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543, the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) of the fourth side wall 543 when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, The upper rear wall 545 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 as the rear wall are respectively projected inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The front surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a ball passage unit 770 and a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, which constitute a ball payout mechanism, are detachably attached to the rear surface thereof. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the inward protrusion width dimension of the shaft support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if there is a width for mounting the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800.

Further, the upper rear surface wall 545 has a flat plate shape on the front surface (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740 described later is attached to the rear surface thereof, so that the lower end side thereof is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, the inward protrusion width of the upper rear wall 545 is sufficient if the height and width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner is sufficient. Further, the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate-like front surface (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports the cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface thereof. Therefore, the inward protrusion width dimension of the open side rear wall 544 is sufficient if there is a width dimension that forms the cover body support cylinder portion 575.

As described above, the front surfaces of the open side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the shaft support side rear wall 546 projecting inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate-shaped portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall up to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by the 543 and the like is secured, for example, even when a game device such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the game board 4 is attached, such a game device The rear protruding part can be easily stored. The inside of the open side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the shaft support side rear wall 546 has a rear opening 580, and the rear opening 580 is closed openly and closably by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 penetrates is above the flat portion on the open side. There are three locations at the bottom, middle and bottom, and the lock locking holes 548 (see FIG. 68) to which the locking projections 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged are further above, middle and lower than the hook holes 549 for the upper and lower doors. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is mounted along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock mounting hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for mounting the lock device 1000 with screws is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed at the top and middle. The lock device 1000 can be attached with screws not only in the upper part and the middle part, but also in the lock attachment hole 547 formed in the upper vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 which will be described later. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fastening the lock device 1000 with a screw.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right sides in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed. A guide arc protrusion 552 that abuts is projected, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed in the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540, and the first side wall 540 and the second A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. Then, when the mounting collar portion 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550, as shown in FIG. 74, the notch portion 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the relief recess 551 and is inside the prize ball tank 720. It functions to prevent ball clogging by depressurizing when the ball pressure of the ball stored in is increased. Further, when the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in a plan view substantially coincide with each other (FIG. 4). (See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2, and lifts the main body frame 3 to the lower side of the main body frame 3 and the decorative cover plate. The purpose is to form a gap between the 15 and the 15 and prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent device through the gap.

Further, on the above-mentioned upper rear wall 545, a rail locking groove 553 for mounting the tank rail member 740 is formed along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed at the bent portion of the 545. Then, the tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking projection pieces 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 to these rail locking grooves 535, 554. Further, a rail hooking elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 535 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail hooking elastic piece 555 is placed on the downstream upper end of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It is designed to come into contact from above.

When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail locking elastic piece 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released in order to release the locked state between the rail locking grooves 535 and 554 and the locking projecting pieces 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hook elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail hook elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is bored to allow the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided on the tank rail member 740 to escape, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. It is in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, and is connected to a wiring connected to a grounding connector provided on the power supply board 1136.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical vertical walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the shaft support side rear wall 546 on the shaft support side rear wall 546, and a ball passage unit is erected between the vertical walls 560. The 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are attached. Further, the prize ball guide protrusion 561 is bent so as to project from the uppermost stream portion between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream portion. The prize ball guide protrusion 561 is projected rearward from the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and when the ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. , Corresponding to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770, and guides the prize balls in a row. Further, on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide protrusion 561, a passage unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball passage unit 770 with a screw and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided so as to project, and a ball break switch described later is provided. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 facing 778 (see FIG. 104) is provided so as to project. The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

Further, from the middle stream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, the engaging projecting piece 565 as a locking portion that engages with the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as the engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800. , The elastic claw 564 for locking that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 (FIG. 106). An escape hole 566 is formed in which the end portion of (see) is received. Further, a relief opening 572 for the payout motor is formed below the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor for the prize ball unit 800 faces the relief opening 572 for the payout motor. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 locks the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost end of the back surface of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side, and is rearward on the shaft support side by the engaging projection piece 565 and the elastic claw for locking 564. It can be detachably attached to the face wall 546. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

Further, at the end of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side on the open side, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed, and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is projected from the wall. The cover body contact groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIGS. 74 and 139) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in line with each other. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. Further, a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 is projected from the locking wall 569, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed to the main body frame 3. Only the person in charge holding the padlock key can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protruding hook piece 570. Can be prevented.

The configuration of the main body frame main body 500 including the game board installation recess 510 and the plate portion 511 has been described above, but in addition to the above description, when the door frame 5 is closed at the lowermost end side portion of the plate portion 511. In an engaging groove 584,585 (see FIG. 67) into which the door frame projecting pieces 110d, 110e (see FIG. 25) bent so that the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 is bent rearward are formed. There is. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the launcher mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. The door frame projecting piece 110d corresponding to the engaging groove 585 is projected rearward so as to be larger than the protruding amount of the door frame projecting piece 110e corresponding to the engaging groove 584. However, a door frame projecting piece 110d having a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed in the lower part of the open end. The door frame projecting pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 form the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connecting member 516 and the launch device mounting portion 520 are formed so as to project, but the launch device mounting portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are formed. The arrangement position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion to the open side of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the launching rail 515 are arranged is the back surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. Since the front surface of the 520 and the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has successfully slipped through the gap between the door frame projecting piece 110d and the engagement groove 585 is used with the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to better pass between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 to reach the front surface side of the game board 4 or the back surface side of the game board 4.

On the other hand, in the region from the substantially central portion to the shaft support side of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are not arranged, the door frame 5 is closed because there is no protruding portion on the surface of the plate portion 511. In, a space 586 is created between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has successfully slipped through the gap between the door frame projecting piece 110d and the engaging groove 584 described above can easily create a space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. Since it is possible to slip through this space 586, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is provided with the space 586 with the door frame 5 closed so that the illegal tool does not slip upward. A security projectile piece 166 that invades the door is formed. The security projectile piece 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from the substantially middle portion of the plate portion 511 to the shaft support side end portion. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a security space 586 for receiving the security projectile piece 166 projecting from the mounting base 160. The crime prevention projectile piece 166 and the security space 586 form an inner protrusion and an engaging portion on the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

As described above, the main body frame 3 includes a game board 4, a ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail member 740, a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a lock device 1000, and a board unit. The 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be described in order below.

[1-3A. Outline configuration of the game board]
The schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 89. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. It is a partial perspective view of. Further, FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component, a game panel, and a panel holder of the game board cut in the vertical direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing the front component mainly constituting the game board. , The game panel, the panel holder, and the like are disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed diagonally from the rear. Further, FIG. 85 is a perspective view shown diagonally from the rear with the main control board box fixed to the board holder for the board. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 85 diagonally after being disassembled into a board holder, a drawer holder, and a main control board box. Further, FIG. 87 is a schematic view of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board viewed through the game window.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a transparent plate-shaped game panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the game panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and a game panel 600 via the panel holder 630. It is composed of a front component 601 attached to the front surface so as to surround the game area 605, and a function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) fixed to the rear side of the front component 601. On the surface of the game panel 600, various game devices and a large number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, after the gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630, and the front component 601 is a cavity having a circular inside so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 605. The outer rail is formed in a shape and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. The inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the abutting portion 620 provided at the end of the 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the abutting portion 620 on the upper side is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 diagonally formed at the starting end portion thereof and connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided as an extension of the launch rail 515, and a foul mouth is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. Further, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul opening 610 to the abutment portion 620.

The abutting portion 620 is provided with an elastic body made of rubber or synthetic resin so as to repel the hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 vigorously inside the game area 605 when the hit ball collides. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball once launched and taken into the inside of the game area 605 from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided so as to project along a part of the metal rail on one lower side of the outer rail 602. The security protrusion 608 vertically overlaps with the security rear end projecting piece 475 that protrudes from the security cover 470 as described above with the door frame 5 closed, and the shafts of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 This is to prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the support side.

Further, an out port 606 is provided in the lower center of the inner rail 603, and the shot ball is launched to the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage, the hit ball that flows backward through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul opening 610 and guided to the foul ball entrance 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. It is designed to be discharged to the dish unit 300 again. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. Further, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the abutment portion 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the security rear projection piece 474 projecting from the security cover 470 intrudes into the security cover 470 with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the uneven engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the security rear projection piece 474, the piano wire or the like that overlaps in the vertical direction and is inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 It finally prevents the invasion of tools.

By the way, on one side of the game board 4, a positioning recess 611 that fits into the board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed, and on the other side of the game board 4, a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when it is pushed in and fixed. Therefore, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the positioning recess 611 is inserted diagonally from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to fit into the board positioning protrusion 576, and then the game board 4 is inserted. The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614, which is in a free state in that state, is pushed in and fixed, and its end is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. .. After that, the game board fixture 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. To remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

Further, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 extremely easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 penetrating the front and rear of the game board 4 is formed at the lower end on the opposite side of the passage cutout 613 below the game board 4 (to be exact). A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component 601), and the fastening bar 617 is horizontally hung and fixed to the lower portion of the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band-shaped fastening portion 618 for hooking the fastening band 619 at substantially the center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal prevention mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3 and the launch rail 515 is launched. A fastening hole 533 that penetrates in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the portion, and a fastening rail 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is delivered to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (FIG. 81). reference).

When the game board 4 configured as described above is stored and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board mounting portion 512 as shown in FIG. 80. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening joint 534 are in the same state. Then, in that state, the tip of a generally commercially available fastening band 619 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 from above the fastening bar 617 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening joint 534 coincide with each other. It is inserted into the fastening hole 533 downward and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. Then, an unnecessary tip portion protruding forward from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut. In this way, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixing tool 519 are released from the fixing unless the fastening band 619 is cut. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if a different fastening band is fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, the game can be played. It is easy to understand that some kind of cheating was performed by removing the board 4. With such an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3.

Further, in the outer shape of the game board 4, notches 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides thereof, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900, which will be described later, is inserted diagonally below the foul mouth 610. A notch 613 for a passage is formed. Further, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate stamp attaching portion 615 for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification is provided. Further, a function display sticker 649 is attached to the upper side of the lower right certificate stamp attaching portion 615 of the front component 601.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the game board 4, balls that have won various game devices (for example, general winning openings 2004, 2101, starting openings 2001, 2002, large winning openings 2003, etc.) provided in the game area 605 are placed on the downstream side. A liquid crystal control board 3281 that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151 and the like) as a display device arranged substantially in the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 that can be aligned and guided. A peripheral board box 622 that houses the peripheral control board 4140 is attached.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 4, a board holder 623 is fixed below the back box 621. The board holder 623 for the board has a space portion (this space portion has a width in the front-rear direction relatively wider than the width of the back box 621) so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of the board holder 623. ) Is formed, and a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with the out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

Further, the board board holder 623 includes a main control board box 624 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls game operations on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186 and a power supply board 1136 provided in the board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal board 625 for connecting is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

Further, the board board holder 623 is formed with a joint guide projection 628 that projects rearward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 as described in detail later. It is inserted into the joint guide hole 1213 formed in the frame board holder 1101 of the board unit 1100 so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component, game panel, panel holder, panel back plate]
Subsequently, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a plate-shaped game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that holds the game panel 600 detachably from the front. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 630 made of, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 that are arranged on the front side of the panel holder 630 to form an outer periphery of the game area 605 and guide the game ball in the game area 605. It mainly includes a front component 601 and a plate-shaped panel back plate 635 arranged within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

As shown in the figure, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b projecting rearward on the rear surface side. Although the details of the positioning boss 601a and the positioning protrusion 601b will be described later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning protrusion 601b can be positioned with the panel holder 630, the board board holder 623, and the game panel 600 arranged on the rear side.

The game panel 600 in the game board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin. .. The thickness of the game panel 600 is thinner than that of the panel holder 630, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail (not shown) is planted.

The game panel 600 includes a plurality of fitting holes 600a arranged in the vicinity of the outer circumference and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 600b arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer circumference and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Each is equipped. These fitting holes 600a and elongated holes 600b are arranged outside the game area 605 and are positioned with the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 600c having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side thereof. The engaging step portion 600c has a form in which substantially half of the plate thickness of the game panel 600 is cut out, and is arranged outside the game area 605 like the fitting hole 600a and the elongated hole 600b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

Further, the game panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 601b projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 603 to the inner rail fixing hole 600d, the inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, the game panel 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined internal shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the center accessory 2400, the starting port unit 2000, and the like are provided, and fixing them. A fixing hole for the purpose is formed at an appropriate position. The openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the game panel 600 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the outer periphery of the game panel 600 is connected. Therefore, the strength of the game panel 600 is increased by the opening 600e. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness of a member made of wooden plywood (for example, a game board base, etc.) in the game board of a conventional pachinko machine. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 630 has a holding step portion 630a that holds the game panel 600 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and front and rear having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. It is mainly provided with a through port 630b that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 600, and the front surface of the game panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 630a has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600. Due to this clearance C, even if the game panel 600 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

Further, the panel holder 630 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the elongated hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 630c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600a and the elongated holes 600b of the game panel 600 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the elongated holes 600b of the game panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the game panel 600 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that engage with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in Exhibit A82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claw 630d is arranged on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 600c in the game panel 600. The holding step portion 630a projects forward from the front surface and elastically engages with the engaging step portion 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engaging piece 630e is arranged in the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 600c in the game panel 600, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. In a state where the engaging step portion 600c of the panel 600 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, a predetermined amount extends toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 630. By engaging the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engaging claws 630d and the engaging piece 630e, the game panel 600 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630.

Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component member 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component member 601 is provided in the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting the 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630 g that is recessed in a predetermined amount on the rear surface side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. Due to this mounting support portion 630 g, the rear surface of the panel holder 630 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protruding rearward, and the amount of the recess is increased. Depth) is set to a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 630 g. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 can be mounted on the pachinko machine 1. It can be securely installed and installed in the gaming board installation recess 510.

Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630, a mounting support portion 630 g is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630 g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. The accommodation recess 630h is further provided with a locking portion 630i which is arranged so as to penetrate in the accommodation recess 630h in the front-rear direction and can lock the locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The accommodating recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by locking the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 630.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 630j (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 621a on the front surface of the back box 621 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 630j, a mounting hole having a large diameter and a small diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. You may use 630j.

Further, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 630l that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height so that the lightening portion 630l reduces the weight of the panel holder 630. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these lightening portions 630l are not formed in the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, that is, in the predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 630 to the predetermined height, and are within the range. Since the front surface of the panel holder 630 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 arranged in the front surface thereof is a substantially flat surface, and the ball launching device 650 The launched game ball is guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the drawing, the panel holder 630 is formed with a lightening portion 630l to form mounting holes 630j and the like in a boss shape, and also supports them and maintains the strength of the panel holder 630. In order to do so, the grid-like ribs are formed.

The panel holder 630 is formed with a positioning portion 630 m corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, the lower portion of the panel holder 630 is further provided with an opening 630n communicating with the out port 606 of the front component member 601 and a communication hole 630o communicating with the foul port 610 of the front component member 601.

Next, the panel back plate 635 is arranged so as to cover the lightening portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630, and the rear surfaces are placed in the accommodating recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a which can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface and are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can screw a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a arranged so as to correspond to the screw holes 635a. It is provided with a positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a recessed portion 635d for weight loss that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side.

The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Further, in the panel back plate 635, similarly to the panel holder 630, the recessed portion 635d forms a boss-shaped portion in which the screw hole 635a, the positioning hole 635b, etc. are formed, and supports them or the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, grid-like ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 630n of the panel holder 630, a communication hole 630o, and an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the boss insertion hole 630f.

The panel back plate 635 is integrated with the panel holder 630 by being housed in the storage recess 630h of the panel holder 630 and by locking the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630. In that state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially the same as the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 630b on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630. Mounting holes made of 635a and the like, and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these mounting holes makes it possible to mount and fix a predetermined member at an arbitrary position.

As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 600 in this example, the game panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claw 630d and the engaging piece 630e are inserted. By engaging the engaging step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the game panel 600, and the front side of the game panel 600 and the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the game panel 600 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 630 without modifying the obstacle nail planting device that is used more, and it is possible to plant obstacle nails. It is possible to suppress the increase in such costs.

Further, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component 601 so that the positions of the obstacle nails, winning openings, etc. may be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing game panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 can be used as common parts, the panel holder 630, the front component 601 and the like can be recycled, and the game panel 600 can be used. It is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a game board 4 that can be used for various models by simply replacing only the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various types such as a back unit 2000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 and a board holder 623 for a board are provided according to the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different, the panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machines 1 regardless of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 630j. It can be made into a part.

In the present embodiment, the game board 4 shows a form in which the transparent game panel 600 forming the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630, but the game panel is similar to the conventional pachinko machine. The 600 may be integrated with the panel holder 630 and may be formed of a wooden plywood such as a veneer plate.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the board board holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The board holder 623 for the board is mounted and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630. As shown in the figure, the board holder 623 has a box shape with the front and the upper side open, and the bottom thereof is substantially the center in the left-right direction and the front side. It is inclined so as to be lowered toward, and after receiving the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600, it can be discharged downward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 623, and next to the main control board box mounting portion 623a (on the right side when viewed from the rear). A sealed portion 624a provided on the main control board box 624 and a corresponding sealed portion 623b are formed. Further, a drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board board holder 623.

The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is attached to the main control board box mounting portion 623a. It is designed to be sealed to the side sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board board holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 is removed. It is now possible to visually determine whether or not it has been removed illegally.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display board 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, this functional display board 640a includes segment display SEG1, SEG2, LEDs 1 to LED12, the segment display SEG1 is assigned the first special symbol display 641, and the segment SEG2 is assigned the second special. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. as special symbols, the first of the start port unit 2000, which will be described later. When the game ball wins in the starting port 2001, the segment display SEG1 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, and when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2002, the segment display SEG2 changes and displays the predetermined special symbol. It has become.

Further, the first special symbol storage lamp 643a is assigned to the LED1, the first special symbol storage lamp 643b is assigned to the LED 2, the second special symbol storage lamp 644a is assigned to the LED 3, and the second special symbol storage lamp 644b is assigned to the LED 4. Each is assigned. When the game ball that has won the first start port 2001 is not used in the variable display of the special symbol, the first special symbol storage display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of the winning game balls as the reserved number. There is. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and when the holding ball is two balls, the first special symbol memory is stored. When the display 643 is lit together and the holding ball is 3 balls, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the holding ball is 4 balls, the first special symbol memory display is displayed. The vessel 643 blinks together. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second start port 2002 is not used in the variable display of the special symbol, the second special symbol storage display 644 is lit or blinks with the number of the winning game balls as the reserved number. It has become. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 644b is turned off, and when the holding ball is two balls, the second special symbol memory is stored. When the display 644 is lit together and the holding ball is 3 balls, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit, and when the holding ball is 4 balls, the second special symbol memory display is displayed. The vessel 644 flashes together.

Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED that can light red / green / orange, and can also light a combination of these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol, so that when the game ball passes through the gate 2300a of the gate member 2200, which will be described later, the predetermined normal symbol is variably displayed.

Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 2300a is gated when it is not used in the variable display of the normal symbol (when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 645 and when the movable piece 2005 is opened and closed. A game ball that is not immediately used for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol after passing 2300a) is set to light the normal symbol storage display 646 with the number of balls of the passed game ball as the reserved number. Specifically, when the holding ball is one ball, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a are turned on and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off, and when the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. When the normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off and the reserved balls are 3 balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b are turned off. All 646 lights up.

Further, a game status indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED that can light red / green / orange, and can also light a combination of these red / green / orange. By displaying the lit color as a gaming state, the LED 10 notifies that the gaming state has a probability fluctuation or a small hit.

Further, a 2-round indicator lamp 648a is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round indicator lamp 648b is assigned to the LED 12, respectively. As described above, the 2-round display lamp 648a lights up to notify that the number of times (round) that the large winning opening 2003 is opened from the closed state is 2 times, while displaying 15 rounds. The lamp 648b lights up to notify that the round is 15 times.

In this way, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a include the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, and the first special symbol storage indicator 643. The second special symbol memory display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol memory display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are assigned to each of them, and the segment display SEG1, which displays various functions, is assigned. SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol memory. The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a.

Further, since the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 fluctuately display the jackpot game state as a special symbol, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Alphanumeric characters and figures are distinguished from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol memory display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648, and the segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LEDs 1 to LED12 assigned to them are used. Etc. are displayed in a variable manner as special symbols.

The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value of 6.

By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). The front component 601 is formed with a segment display opening 601c at a position corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, so that the contents displayed by these segment display SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is provided with the front component 601. The LEDs 1 to 12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when they are attached to the back surface of the game board 4. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lighting or blinking light of the LEDs 1 to 12 is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by the LEDs 1 to LED12 lighting or blinking are printed on the function display sticker 649 described later. The front component 601 is formed with a function display sticker sticking portion 601e for sticking the function display sticker 649. A recess 601f is formed in the function display sticker affixing portion 601e. A tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver is inserted into the recess 601f to make it easier to remove the function display sticker 649 attached. Here, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display sticker 649 in order to make it easier to peel off the function display sticker 649, but when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker sticking portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the recess 601f is formed in the function display sticker affixing portion 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not come off from the function display sticker affixing portion 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 of the game machine 4 is printed on the surface of the game machine 4 by grouping it into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display, and is printed in the non-game area of the game board 4. It is attached to the function display sticker affixing portion 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 is composed of a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643, and these first special symbol display 641 and first special symbol storage display 641. The 643 is partitioned in a state surrounded by a visible solid line SL1 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol storage display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various information regarding the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001 is displayed. For example, when a start prize is given to the first start port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 fluctuates a predetermined special symbol, or the first special symbol storage display 643 uses the number of winning game balls as a reserved number. It lights up or blinks. In this way, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, these first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can tell the player that indicates various information regarding the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001. As a result, the player can visually change the group Grp1 printed on the function display sticker 649, which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and the special symbol changes due to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 is composed of the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644, and these second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage are stored. The display 644 is divided in a state surrounded by a visible solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various information regarding the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002 is displayed. For example, when a game ball starts and wins a prize at the second starting port 2002, the second special symbol display 642 fluctuates a predetermined special symbol, or displays the number of winning game balls as a reserved number in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or blinks. In this way, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, these second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 Can tell the player that indicates various information regarding the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002. As a result, the player can visually check the group Grp2 printed on the function display sticker 649, which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2, to display the variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002. You can easily check various information about.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 is composed of a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 capable of visually recognizing these normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646. It is partitioned in a state surrounded by and printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the ordinary symbol display 645 fluctuates the opening / closing of the movable piece 2005 as a predetermined ordinary symbol, and when the movable piece 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state, the game ball moves to the second starting port 2002. It will be easier to win a prize. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. A star is printed so that it can be distinguished from the 646, the game status indicator 647, and the round indicator 648. In this group Grp3, various information about the gate 2300a can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2300a, the normal symbol display 645 fluctuates to display a predetermined normal symbol, or the normal symbol storage display 646 lights up with the number of passed game balls as the reserved number. In this way, by grouping the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 into one group Grp3, these normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are various in relation to the variable display of the normal symbol. It is possible to tell the player that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information regarding the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 in which the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. The round indicator 648 is printed with a value 2 which is the maximum number of rounds at the position corresponding to the 2-round indicator lamp 648a so that the maximum number of rounds can be easily understood, and the position corresponding to the 15-round indicator lamp 648b. Is printed with a value of 15, which is the maximum number of rounds. As described above, the game status indicator 647 displays the lit color as the game status to notify that the game status has a probability fluctuation or a small hit, and the two-round display lamp 648a has the large winning opening 2003. The number of times (rounds) from the closed state to the open state is lit and notified, and the 15-round indicator lamp 648b lights and notifies that the number of rounds is 15 times. As a result, the player can easily confirm the game state by visually observing the game state indicator 647 printed on the function display sticker 649, which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL4. By visually observing the two-round indicator lamp 648a printed on the function display sticker 649, which is partitioned in an enclosed state, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two, and the solid line SL6 It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 by visually observing the 15-round indicator lamp 648b, which is partitioned in an enclosed state and printed on the function display sticker 649.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Group Grp3 are divided in a state surrounded by the solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649, and the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator The positions corresponding to 648 are divided and printed in a state of being surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648.

In this way, the function display sticker 649 is collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, and the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12 are grouped into groups Grp1 to Grp3 and the like. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star mark is printed on the ordinary symbol display 645 and the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are understood. It is easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 88, the correspondence between such a function and the printed content is printed on the function display sticker 649 as the sticker control number 649a. As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the sticker control number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the recess 601f provided in the function display sticker affixing portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. This makes it difficult for the player to see the recess 601f.

Further, the seal control number 649a is for preventing a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from mistakenly attaching a function display sticker having a different specification when assembling the pachinko machine 1. Further, the seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display seal 649, and modes such as group Grp1 to group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. As a result, when the seal control number 649a is examined, the inventory of the function display seal 649 corresponding to the seal control number 649a can be found.

Here, in recent years, the development period of pachinko machines has become shorter as the life cycle of pachinko machines has been shortened. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round indicator lamp and a 15-round indicator lamp that light and notify that the number of times (rounds) that the large winning opening 2003 is opened from the closed state are 2 times and 15 times. In addition to this, when adding a 5-round indicator lamp or an 8-round indicator lamp that lights up to notify that the number of rounds is 5 or 8 times, or when reducing the number of starting ports from 2 to 1. The specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. Since the content printed on the function display sticker is also changed due to such a change in the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12 and the content printed on the function display sticker are described above. Correspondence relationship is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. As a result, for example, in the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4, it is determined whether or not the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 and the function display sticker 649 correspond to each other. It can be confirmed by visually observing the sticker control number 649a, and it is possible to prevent the function display sticker 649, which does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, from being attached. The function display sticker 649 is a sticker, and there is no work process of applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display sticker 649, which contributes to the improvement of productivity.

[1-3B. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. 90 is an overall perspective view (A) of the hitting ball launching device 650, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view (B) in a state where the launching motor portion is removed. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. 92. Is a front view (A) showing the relationship between the hitting ball launching device 650 and the launching rail 515, and a perspective view (B) of the launching motor portion. FIG. 93 shows the hitting ball launching in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is not operated. FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the launch rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball launching device 650 and the launch rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is being operated. Reference numeral 95 denotes a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and an AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball launching device 650. Is.

The hitting ball launching device 650 rotatably supports the hitting mallet 687 on the launching base frame 651, and attaches a launching motor 695 that imparts reciprocating rotation to the hitting mallet 687 to the launching base frame 651, and further mounts the hitting mallet 687. A slide hammer 677 for adjusting the urging force of the urging spring 684 and a slide member 710 for adjusting the urging force for urging the spring 684 are provided on the firing base frame 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the launch base frame 651 is formed of a synthetic resin into a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a bearing in which the bearing 689 of the ball hammer 687 is fitted in the substantially center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 that regulate the launch origin position of the ball hammer 687 are attached and fixed to the upper portion and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting mallet 687 when the hitting mallet 687 returns to the firing origin position by the urging force of the urging spring 684. Further, a horizontally elongated narrow groove-shaped slide guide hole 655 is formed above the rear of the launch base frame 651 (opposite the portion corresponding to the lower part of the launch rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

The slide guide hole 655 is provided with a guide locking piece 678 projecting from the upper part of the rear end of the slide rod 677, which will be described later, to guide the slide movement of the slide rod 677, and is provided in the slide member storage space 656. , The slide member 710 is housed so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is provided to the guide bush 681 which is fixed to the guide hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by the set screw 682 in the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677. It is done by penetrating. Further, as shown in FIG. 92, a rectangular connecting opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

Further, an eaves portion is formed in the front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651, and an opening 657 for an operating piece is bored in the eaves portion above the bearing cylinder 652. There is. The opening 657 for the operating piece is provided with a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the ball hitting supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The working piece 658 that comes into contact with the working piece 658 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on the mounting portion 660 projecting from the rear upper portion of the opening edge of the working piece opening 657. The working piece 658 is formed in a "rail" shape, the rear end of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the hammer 687 from the shaft support to the arc portion below. The upper side swings the ball feed member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting mallet 687 in contact with the working piece contact portion 693 projecting from the 690, and the ball feeding port 172 swings to swing the ball feed member 172. The hit balls flowing out from 171b are supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 515 one by one.

Further, the launch base frame 651 is provided with motor mounting bosses 661 for fastening the motor cover 694 containing the launch motor 695 at two locations at the rear lower portion and one location at the front upper portion, for a total of three locations. At the same time, a swing piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swing piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted to slide the slide rod 677 behind the lower portion of the slide member storage space 656 is projected. ing.

A metal plate 665 is attached to the launch base frame 651 so as to be substantially in close contact with the launch base frame 651 in order to increase the rigidity of the ball launching device 650. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. Along with the formation of 671, a horizontally elongated elliptical through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 penetrates is also penetrated. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, the respective through holes 666 to 671 form the corresponding members 652,655,655,681,712,663. It is fixed to the launch base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the launch base frame 651 and screwed so as to penetrate or match.

The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes its head from the through hole 671, but the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted through the head portion. , The swing piece 672 is swingably supported around the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the rocking piece 672 is formed in a vertically elongated rod shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and a slightly elongated hole shape in which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connecting hole 674 serves as an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Then, the swing piece 672 is inserted into the swing piece boss 663, and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with a washer. By anchoring to the convex portion 712, the swing piece 672 is attached to the launch base frame 651. The attached rocking piece 672 swings its upper portion around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

Further, a horizontally long rod-shaped slide rod 677 is slidably attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 in the left-right direction. That is, the L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper portion of the slide rod 677 is penetratingly engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is formed. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide rod 677 is slidably mounted on the launch base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide elongated hole 680 and the guide bush 681. Further, the slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that comes into contact with the abutting portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end) thereof, and one end of the urging spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 of the above is projected.

The bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing 689 of the ball hammer 687 is fitted into the bearing cylinder 652 so as not to come off. The lower end of the ball hammer 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689, and at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed to the shaft. The base plate 690 is provided with a working piece contact portion 693 that comes into contact with the working piece 658 on the front back surface side thereof, and a spring for hooking the locking ring 686 at the other end of the urging spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projecting piece 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin mallet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting mallet 687, and the launch position formed by the lower end portion of the launch rail 515 and the launch position stopper 702 fixed above the hammer tip 688. I'm facing to rush into.

On the other hand, the launch motor 695 housed in the motor cover 694 is mounted on the above-mentioned motor mounting boss 661 of the launch base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 has a cylindrical portion formed so as to house the launch motor 695 inside, and a motor mounting boss 661 that is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion. A mounting portion in which a mounting fixing hole 699 for mounting is formed is integrally formed, and a reverse rotation prevention cam 698 and a motor cam 697 are formed at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the launch motor 695 housed inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer circumference of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and the firing motor engages with the stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) that is swingably fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701. It prevents the 695 from rotating in the opposite direction. This is to prevent a failure that the motor cam 697 rotates in the opposite direction and the motor cam 697 and the motor contact projecting piece 691 mesh with each other so that the ball launching device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a magatama shape, and as the firing motor 695 rotates, the hitting mallet 687 is reciprocated while engaging with the motor contact projecting piece 691. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor mounting boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main configuration of the ball striking device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 that is stored in the slide member storage space 656 and slides to move is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with an open rear portion, and an elliptical convex portion 711 protrudes from the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected at a position behind the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on the upper surface and the lower surface, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arcuate cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the front in the sliding direction, and projects from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface toward the inside slightly rearward of the first inclined surface 715. A holding piece 716 is formed which is formed and a predetermined distance is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 that is laterally inclined toward the back is also formed on the front side of the holding piece 716. Then, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end side of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts on the side wall in the front in the slide direction. It is in a state of being inserted between the upper and lower holding pieces 716. A space portion 718 is formed on the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, but the space portion 718 does not particularly perform a function.

Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92 (A) in a state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connecting opening 664 of the shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one of the inner walls of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92 (A), the inner wall of the left space is used. Although it is shown as being in contact with each other, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the space on the right under normal conditions.)

Therefore, first, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the slide member 710 and the urging spring 684 of the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 is located at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (on the right in FIG. 92A). When it is in contact with the inner wall of the space), the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the urging force of the urging spring 684, and is in contact with the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The slide rod 677 is in contact with the contacted portion 679. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hammer 687 reciprocates in accordance with the rotation of the launch motor 695, the return force of the hammer 687 is weak and the hit ball at the launch position is hit. Even if it is issued, it does not reach the game area 605 of the game board 4.

On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the inner wall of the left space in FIG. 92 (A)), as shown in FIG. 94. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts around the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 moves in the other direction (right side in FIG. 94) due to the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide toward. Then, the urging spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also in a tensioned and extended state. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is tensioned, the returning force of the hammer 687 becomes stronger when the hammer 687 reciprocates in accordance with the rotation of the launch motor 695, and the hit ball at the launch position is released. It is strongly repelled and reaches the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the elastic force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

As described above, the elastic force of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted by moving the slide member 710, and the movement of the slide member 710 is the rotation of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 described above. It is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in response to the rotation operation of the movement operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like.

As described above, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, the magatama-shaped cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 also rotates, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 The 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. Therefore, the slide projecting piece 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 penetrates the connecting opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is designed to be inserted into space 714. In this case, the inserted state is a state in which one end side of the slide projecting piece 183 on the inclined side 183a side is in contact with the side wall in the front in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower holding pieces 716 as described above. .. Therefore, when the slide projecting piece 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, the slide rod 677 also slides with the slide movement of the slide member 710, so that the urging force of the urging spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the elastic force of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400.

By the way, in the present embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided in the door frame 5 and the ball striking device 650 is provided in the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 of the handle device 400 is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the hitting ball launching device 650 cooperate with or separate from each other. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400 The hitting ball launching device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 separates from the insertion space 714 from the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650. Therefore, it is possible to link and separate the handle device 400 and the ball launching device 650 with the opening and closing of the door frame 5 very easily. In particular, when the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the holding piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 183 is slightly displaced in the vertical direction. The surface 717 allows the slide projecting piece 183 to be smoothly inserted into the sandwiching position.

In some cases, the player stuffs the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fixes it at a position where the stuffing is rotated to some extent, but the clerk at the game hall does not know the stuffing and fixes the door frame. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 183 is simply separated from the insertion space 714, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 183 is not a problem. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but due to the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the slide projecting piece 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the slide member 710, the slide member accompanies the closing operation of the door frame 5. The slide projecting piece 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving the 710 in one direction. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hit ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. Is.

[1-3 C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank mounting groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and the bottom surface thereof is from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. The storage portion 728 is formed by the first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the surface and the second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

Further, a discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the slope of the second sloped bottom surface 727, and the discharge port 730 projects outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by the discharge port protruding wall 725 connecting in a U shape. Further, mounting collars 733 that engage with the tank mounting groove 550 are formed on the outer sides of both ends of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, and the second body frame 3 is formed on the back surface side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. A mounting contact piece 731, 732 that mounts and contacts the four side wall 543 is projected, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower portion of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A break-in mounting shaft 735 is provided so as to project. Further, an overflow prevention member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange portion 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It is brought into contact with the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is mounted on the upper part of the main body frame 3 on the back surface side, and in this mounted state, as shown in FIG. 74, it is stored via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described below. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) for storing the balls is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. -The width of the fourth side wall 543 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same, and the side walls 541 to 543 are placed on the upper part of the side wall 543.

Further, as described above, since the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear protruding space of the peripheral portion of the game board 4, the side walls 541 to 541 Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is formed shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is formed even if the prize balls are stored and the weight increases. Since the entire surface is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored balls can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the balls stored in the storage unit 728 can flow outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured in. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which an opening is provided in a part of the inclined bottom surface as a discharge port as in the conventional case, a ball breaking protrusion for eliminating ball clogging is formed in a protrusion near the discharge port. It is possible to have a structure in which ball clogging is unlikely to occur.

Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, the prize ball tank 720 storage portion is placed on the upper outside of the rear side wall walls 541 to 543 for accommodating the rear protruding portion of the gaming device, and the prize is awarded. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 is provided so as to project outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage portion, the tank rail member 740 is provided outside the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 (the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction at the side), the rear protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper side of the rear side wall 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rear protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes from the upper side of the gaming board 4. It can be easily stored inside the rear side walls 541 to 543.

Further, regardless of whether or not the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is mounted on the upper outer side of the rear side wall 541 to 543 for accommodating the rear protrusion of the game device, the discharge port 730 is the prize ball tank 720. It has a unique effect not found in the conventional prize ball tank only by the configuration that it is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722. This will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the ball at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, in the normal state, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and stayed in the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion is opened to form the discharge port 730A as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the ball breaking protrusion 736A A prize ball tank having a discharge port 730A formed on the opposite side of the ball, or when a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to a ball breaking protrusion 736B as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge port 730A In the portion of 730B, the pressure of the stored ball and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure always apply the ball pressure to the discharge ports 730A and 730B from all sides.

For this reason, even if the pressures of the balls are balanced by the degree of polymerization of the balls and the balls on the downstream side flow out, a ball biting state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B, resulting in ball clogging. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 97 (C). The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 portion is a pressure from two directions only the acting force from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and the reaction thereof, and the pressure is not received from all directions as in the conventional case. Therefore, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, the ball biting state at the discharge port 730 portion is unlikely to occur, and an excellent effect that the ball clogging does not occur can be obtained.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Subsequently, the tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. , A prize ball tank 720, a tank rail member 740, a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, and a full tank unit 900, which is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 100 is a tank rail. It is sectional drawing (A) and plan view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740 and the upstream part of a ball passage unit 770.

As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 535 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking projection pieces 749 to be inserted into the rail locking groove 553 from above on the left and right sides and the lower side of the side surface on the rear surface side, and the upper side of the side surface on the rear surface side. A hook-shaped locking projection 750 that is hooked from above to the rail locking groove 554 is provided in the center. The tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined gutter shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 faces the ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. Facing. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 is a passage 742 in which balls are aligned in two rows and flow down by a partition wall 741.

The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove so that a foreign substance that rolls along with the ball in the passage 742 falls downward from the fine groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-mentioned ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the ball flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded to the outside from the metal plate via the ground wire connector 557 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 1136.

Further, an egg-shaped ball smoothing member 744 having a weight slightly downstream of the middle basin of the tank rail member 740 is provided so as to be swingable. The ball leveling member 744 is swingably supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the prize ball tank 720 described above, and is directed toward the inside of each of the two rows of passages 742 in the tank rail member 740. When a sphere that hangs down and flows down each passage 742 flows down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction, it is rectified so that it becomes one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side of the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with the ball holding plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that a ball that has not been made into one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forcibly made into one step.

Further, at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 facing the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is deviated by half a pitch. Therefore, when the upper part of the ball flowing down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows down to the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the balls of the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the sphere flowing through each passage 742 is guided toward the center along the inclined surface 743 formed in the lower part of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gear 747. During the guidance, the balls from the two rows of passages 742 are alternately dropped in a row at the upper end entrance 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The upper surface of the alignment gear 747 is covered with an arc-shaped gear cover 746.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped in a row from the tank rail member 740 to the prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connecting structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In addition, in FIGS. 102 and 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 in an easy-to-understand manner by removing the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat radiating plate 841, and the unit sub plate 825. is there. However, gears and the like are shown by alternate long and short dash lines to make it easier to understand the relationship with the ball passage.

In the ball passage unit 770 of this example, the ball drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent on the back surface (the surface visible from the back surface is referred to as a front surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front-rear bending passage portion 772a whose upstream side bends in the front-rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front-rear bending passage portion 772a to the left and right. It is composed of a left-right bending passage portion 772b that bends in a direction (left-right direction when viewed from the back surface) and a vertical passage portion 772c that communicates with the left-right bending passage portion 772b and is substantially vertical.

As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the front-rear bending passage portion 772a has a main body because the position of the upper end inlet 773 that falls from the tank rail member 740 described above is substantially the center of the two rows of passages 742 as described above. Since the position is separated from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the frame 3 to the back side, the prize ball guide protrusions projecting from the front-rear bending passage portion 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546. The ball drop passage 772 is bent in the front-rear direction so as to be close to the surface of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side by 561. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b have a U-shape that substantially fills the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the ball that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is also formed substantially vertically, it is formed by being slightly curved, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one of the bent passage walls 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c, and the notch portion 775 is formed. A ball breakage detection piece 776 whose upper end is pivotally supported by a support shaft 777 is swingably attached to the 775. A ball-cutting switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball-cutting detection piece 776, and the actuator 779 of the ball-cutting switch 778 is in contact with the ball-cutting detection piece 776. A ball-out detection mechanism for detecting ball-out in the vertical passage portion 772c is configured by a ball-out detection piece 776 and a ball-out switch 778.

Then, when a sphere is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the sphere breakage detection piece 776 is pressed by the sphere existing in the vertical passage portion 772c to push the actuator 779 to turn on the sphere break switch 778, but the vertical passage When the ball disappears due to the ball clogging or the ball deficiency in the portion 772c, the ball breakage detection piece 776 swings toward the inside of the vertical passage portion 772c, so that the actuator 779 turns off the ball breakage switch 778. When the ball-out switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swing of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the side opposite to the passage, and the ball of the ball passage unit 770. An insertion groove 781 for ball clogging is formed in the vertical passage portion 772c corresponding to the break detection piece 776. When it is difficult for the ball breakage detection piece 776 to swing due to ball jamming or the like, the ball jamming insertion groove 781 is inserted with a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to cause the ball breakage detection piece 776 to be jammed. It is provided to solve the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball breakage detection piece 776 is formed in a slightly bulging shape toward the ball breakage detection piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball-out detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball-out switch 778.

Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 at a position avoiding the ball drop passage 772 described above. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is also a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. It corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Then, in order to mount the ball passage unit 770 on the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are aligned with each other while engaging the positioning boss 783 with the positioning pin 574. This can be done by screwing the screw 784 from the stop hole 782 in the state. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with the engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side thereof, and is for connecting to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. The connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate material, and is formed by projecting a pair of passage walls 790, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770. A protrusion shaft 789 as a rotating shaft portion protruding from the tip of a support piece 788 extending from both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted to a support protrusion 787 as a shaft support projecting from both left and right ends of the connecting lid member 786. As a result, it is rotatably supported by the shaft. Further, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 are in communication with each other (FIG. 105 (B)). It can rotate into a state (shown) and a state in which the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (state shown in FIG. 105 (A)). A guide protrusion 791 for guiding the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 is projected from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball passage unit 770 when shifting from the open state to the closed state.

Thus, the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted to the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, whereby the ball drop passage 772 and the prize ball of the ball passage unit 770 are locked. The bending passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790, and the ball falling through the ball falling passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bending passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided on the ball passage unit 770 is that the prize ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as described later, and the detachable connection lid member 786 is provided. This is because the space formed between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 due to the mounting on the ball does not hinder the smooth fall of the ball.

Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is projected from the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the prize ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the back surface so that the upper end entrance 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located at substantially the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front-rear bending passage portion 772a that bends in the front-rear direction when viewed from the entanglement. As a result, in a configuration in which balls flowing down in two rows are alternately sent to the prize ball unit 800 side by a pair of alignment gears 747, the balls are smoothly sent to the prize ball unit 800 one by one through the ball drop passage 772. Can be done. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to configure the ball drop passage 772 from the assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

Further, the ball that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 through the front-rear bending passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left-right bending passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the prize ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. .. Further, the vertical passage portion 772c to which the ball is sent in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball breakage detection mechanism (ball breakage detection piece 776 and ball breakage switch 778) for detecting the ball breakage. As a result, it is possible to reliably detect that the ball has run out in the ball falling passage 772, in other words, that the ball supplied to the prize ball unit 800 has run out (ball out).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 arranged on the downstream side of the ball passage unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit 800 as viewed from the rear side, FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member, and FIG. 108 is a rear view. It is a rear view for explaining the passage and the driving relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 108.

In FIG. 106, the prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 and a unit base body 801 in which a bending passage 803, a prize ball passage 810, and a ball pulling passage 811 are formed by a pair of bending passage walls 802. Provided in the unit sub plate 825 covering the rear surface, the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825, and the substantially central surface region (rear surface side region) of the unit sub plate 825. It is composed of a gear group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be described in sequence.

The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a "bottom surface"), and a pair of bending passages projecting toward the plate-shaped unit sub plate 825 side. The bending passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 projects from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to approximately the middle of the downstream side at intervals slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, but is largely divided into left and right from the middle to the downstream side. From to the downstream end, it also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801. Further, the portion where the bending passage wall 802 in the middle is largely divided into left and right constitutes a distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and the unit base body 801 is formed from the lower part of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided into left and right up to the downstream end of the wall.

That is, two passages are formed from the distribution space 805 to the left and right by the left and right bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 from the middle to the downstream side, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810. The other passage constitutes the ball-extracting passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for accommodating the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is stored in the motor storage space 814 formed within the depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball pulling passage 811). It is fixed. The bending passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape to reduce the pressure on the sprocket 807 of the ball parked in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but is on the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust and the like that have entered the bending passage 803, and the dust and the like that have accumulated when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3 can be taken out.

Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the figure) recesses formed in which spheres fit on the outer circumference is rotatably arranged. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotating shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end of the passage partition wall 809 forming the bottom of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one of them is formed. , The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

The counting switch 812 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes at the tip portion, and a switch fitting recess 865 matching the shape of the rear end portion is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. The wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit, which will be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed in the passage lid plate portion 859 integrally formed with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813s are formed. However, of the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one of the locking portions 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

Further, a circular motor storage space 814 for accommodating the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball ejection passage 811. The motor storage space 814 is formed. The cylindrical body of the payout motor 815 is housed inside the motor. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back surface side of the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 by a pair of attachment pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, with the payout motor 815 attached to the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 bored in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 and first. The gear 843 is fixed.

Further, by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat radiating plate 841, the space in the depth width direction in which the above-mentioned bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, and ball pulling passage 811 are formed. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is also housed and arranged inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for accommodating the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 for arranging the sprocket 807 described above are formed in a very close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 is in the vertical direction. The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide projectile 819 that guides the ball pulled out to the back surface side of the prize ball unit 800 at the lowermost end of the ball pulling passage 811, and the guide projectile 819 is provided with the guide projectile 819. The guided ball is guided to the ball-extracting connection passage 880, which will be described later, and is finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a recovery gutter provided below the island stand). Further, a locking elastic claw 820 for locking the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 described above is projected from the upper portion of the unit base body 801 and the prize ball unit 800 is placed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engaging hole 821 and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 for detachably attaching to the rear wall 546, and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched between them. Is provided.

A rod-shaped attachment / detachment button 822 provided on one upper side of the unit base body 801 is slidably attached to the button insertion engagement hole 821 in the depth width direction, and as will be described later, the front tip thereof. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 is concave so that the tip end portion of the locking elastic claw 564 can be inserted. Further, the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with the engaging projecting piece 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing it downward, the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projecting piece 565 are engaged with each other. Then, in the engaged state, the elastic claw 564 for locking and the button insertion engaging hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the prize ball unit 800 cannot be moved upward.

The hook-shaped engaging portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right sides of the unit base body 801. Further, the mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched is a through hole that protrudes long toward the rear surface side and is bored in the unit sub plate 825. After penetrating 858, it corresponds to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866, and by screwing the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are connected with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched. doing.

Explaining the configuration of the unit sub plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 described above, the unit sub plate 825 is a composite that covers the bending passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. The payout motor 815 is attached to the resin plate material, and the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball ejection passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for mounting the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is formed on the front side (rear surface side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843 and 843 are formed below the relay board region 826. A gear region 840 to which the 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 on which the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is mounted are projected along the square shape, and mounting ribs 827 are projected above and below the vertical side on one side thereof, which will be described later. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with the engaging projection 836 of the board cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking protrusion 837 of the board cover 835 is formed in the center of the other side vertical side. There is. Further, in the relay board area 826, a button insertion hole 834 into which the attachment / detachment button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit with screws (not shown) are formed. ..

The relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit attached to the relay board area 826 described above includes wiring from the counting switch 812, the payout motor 815, and the rotation angle switch 855 described later, which are provided in the prize ball unit 800, and described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126), and is provided with a plurality of connectors for that purpose, and is provided in the button insertion hole 833 and the mounting boss portion 832 into which the attachment / detachment button 822 is inserted. A corresponding mounting hole 831 is bored. Then, in a state where the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is mounted on the mounting rib 827 of the relay board area 826, the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are matched and fastened with a screw (not shown) to win the prize. The relay terminal plate 830 in the ball unit can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub plate 825.

Further, the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engaging protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of the vertical side thereof, and a locking protrusion 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the vertical side on the other side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Then, the engaging projection 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engaging groove portion 828 of the relay board region 826 to engage the substrate cover 835, and then the locking protrusion 837 and the locking claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The board cover 835 can cover the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit. On the contrary, when removing it, the locking claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the locking protrusion 837, and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally toward the front side to pull the engaging projection 836 and the engaging groove portion 828. The engagement with can be disengaged. In the state where the board cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. There is. Further, the wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 provided in the gear region 840 formed on the unit sub plate 825, and the detection disk 850 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and projects to the surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a shaft in which a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is bored in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the shaft 845 whose other end is supported in the hole 846, and above the second gear 844, the unit sub plate 825. The shaft 848 press-fitted into the formed shaft hole 849 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 808 that pivotally supports the sprocket 807.

As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end portion of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in the receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. Further, the rotary shaft 808 is supported by press-fitting one end into a bearing cylinder 806 formed in the unit base body 801 and the other end being supported by a bearing hole formed in the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through the shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the central front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with the rotation shaft 808 as the center. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the payout motor 815 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

The outer circumference of the detection disk 850 is formed to be one size larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the case of drawing). 3) detection notches 851 are formed in. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting / receiving type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detecting means) provided on the sensor substrate 854 which is sandwiched and supported by the substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub plate 825. Is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detected notches 851 within a predetermined interval time during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (mostly in a ball-biting state by the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and reverse a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, ball-biting state). It is something to do. The number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 described above and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between the substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side, and the gear cover 866 covering the gear region 840 is provided. Is formed with a mounting hole 867 which is projected from the unit base body 801 and is bored at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 which penetrates the through hole 858 of the unit sub plate 825. Then, the mounting holes 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub plate 825 side. By screwing from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in this state with screws 868, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed while sandwiching the unit sub plate 825. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit and the payout control board 1186 described later) is provided. A wiring processing piece 869 that is hung and tied up is projected.

The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub plate 825, the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is housed at a position below the bending passage 803 in which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 has a sprocket 807 arranged in the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball pulling passage 811), and a position avoiding the ball passage and having a depth width dimension of the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in the motor storage space 814 formed inside is provided, and the unit sub-plate 825 is provided with a rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side thereof to rotate the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) is provided to transmit to the shaft 808, and the distribution space 805 of the payout motor 815 and the bending passage 803 is provided. The sprocket 807 as the payout member to be arranged is connected so as to be rotationally driven by a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847, 850 (852) provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub plate 825. .. That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are housed within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball pulling passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. Moreover, the rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connects the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 is placed on the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub plate 825. Since it is provided along the predetermined width of the above, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a part of the payout motor or the sprocket is arranged outside the ball passage.

Further, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball pulling passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. Is being planned. That is, unlike the conventional method in which the payout motor 815 is projected to the front side, the rear surface side, or the side side of the prize ball unit, when it is attached to the rear surface side of the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Any part of the prize ball unit 800 may have a structure that does not protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. As shown in FIG. 71, this protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear surface wall 546. Since it faces the front part of the main body frame 3 from the lower relief opening 572 for the payout motor, as a result, it protrudes only by the dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness dimension of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side from the protruding dimension. Therefore, the amount of protrusion toward the front of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side is small. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is mounted and the back surface of the game board 4. A large storage space for accommodating the rear protruding portion of the game device can be taken in the depth width direction.

Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and an engaging projecting piece 565 are used. The prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported so that the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked on the locking groove 573 and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projecting piece 565 are engaged with each other. Push it down while keeping it in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projecting piece 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. By moving the prize ball unit 800 upward, the above-mentioned engaging states are easily released. In order to prevent this, the elastic claw 564 for locking engages with the button insertion engaging hole 821. It is designed to do.

That is, the elastic claw 564 for locking and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the mounted state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball of the ball passage unit 770 falls. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage composed of a pair of passage walls 790. Further, in the state where the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 and the prize ball entrance 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later are connected, and the downstream end of the ball removal passage 811 is the ball removal connection passage. It is connected to the upstream end of the 880.

On the other hand, when removing the prize ball unit 800, the engagement by the locking elastic claw 820 is released, the connecting lid member 786 is rotated toward the front side, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to press the locking elastic claw 564. Move it to the front side to disengage the elastic claw 564 for locking and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then pull up the prize ball unit 800 while pressing the detachable button 822 to release the prize ball unit 800. The prize ball unit 800 is pulled out toward the front side by disengaging the engagement between the lower end portion of the above and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projection piece 565. It can be easily removed.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Subsequently, the full tank unit 900 arranged on the downstream side of the prize ball unit 800 described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. It is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back surface of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul mouth 610. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul opening 610.

As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the box main body is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. It is composed of 901 and a lid 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. In the box main body 901, the ball flowing in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and is discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 is formed in the upstream portion thereof to guide the ball flowing in from the prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 from one end to the other side. At one end of the side guidance passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, a side guidance receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape for guiding the ball toward the side is provided, and the side guidance passage 902 is provided. A cushioning member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the 902 to receive the impact of the ball flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the ball to the downstream side.

Further, the sphere that collides with the cushioning member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guidance passage 902 is guided to flow in the direction opposite to the flow of the sphere in the side guidance passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. The opposite side guidance passage 905 is formed. The ball flowing through the opposite side guidance passage 905 is then guided by the front guidance passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the flow of the front guidance passage 920. Guided by the ball gutter 343.

By the way, on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the opposite side guidance passage 905, a bottom surface opening 906 that opens over the entire bottom surface is formed, and the bottom surface swing plate 907 swingably closes the bottom surface opening 906. There is. The bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape with an open upper surface, and a pair of shaft support protrusions 911 are projected on the side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. Further, a circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by fitting the shaft support protrusion 911 on the downstream side of the back surface when viewed from the front. The portion 908 is formed so as to project.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 for locking the upper end of the spring 913 is projected downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is always urged in the direction in which the upstream side thereof is swung upward by the urging force of the spring 913. Then, in the spring 913, even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at one time, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not swing downward, and the prize ball It is formed of a spring member having a spring coefficient that causes a predetermined number of balls, which is equal to or larger than the number to be paid out, to swing downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, the detection projecting piece 909 projects forward toward the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. When the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and pivotally supported by the shaft support protrusion 911, the detection protrusion 909 penetrates the communication hole 929 and is located in the switch storage space 914 described below. It has become.

Further, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full switch 916 is integrally formed on the outside of the side wall at the upstream end of the opposite side guidance passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall at the upstream end of the reverse side guidance passage 905 at the upper part of the switch storage space 914, and the switch mounting portion 918 is formed. The mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 holding the full switch 916 is fastened to the portion 918 by the screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch including a floodlight and a light receiver, and the detection projection piece 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light receiver to detect ON / OFF.

Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side on the downstream side of the opposite side guidance passage 905. The foul ball passage 922 is formed by bending so that the foul ball entrance 923 on the upstream side communicates with the foul mouth 610 described above and the downstream side thereof communicates with the upstream side of the forward guidance passage 920, as shown in FIG. 114. Has been done. Therefore, the foul ball taken into the foul opening 610 is guided from the foul ball entrance 923 to the forward guidance passage 920 through the bent foul ball passage 922, and further through the exit 921 and the prize ball connecting gutter 343 to the plate unit. Returned to 300.

Further, the box main body 901 is provided with an engaging piece 924 that is engaged with the unit engaging groove 532 formed in the full tank unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. At the same time, a hook projection 925 that engages with the hook piece 928 formed on the lid body 926 is formed. The hook projection 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right rear side walls of the box main body 901.

On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901, and the side guide passage. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end in 902. Further, around the lid body 926, a hook piece 928 for engaging with the hook protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is projected downward.

In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance passage 902. It enters and is guided sideways by the side guidance receiving portion 903 and collides with the cushioning member 904. The ball that collides with the cushioning member 904 is guided to the forward guide passage 920 by being guided in the opposite side guide passage 905 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 as it is toward the downstream side, and the front guide passage 920 It is led to the plate unit 300 from the exit 921 through the prize ball connecting gutter 343. In addition, the foul ball that entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joins the front guidance passage 920, and passes through the prize ball communication gutter 343 from the exit 921 of the front guidance passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

Then, in the normal state, when the ball naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the ball moves from the side guidance passage 902 to the opposite side guidance passage 905, it falls on the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of prize balls paid out is about the same, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not swing, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. 115, the detection projecting piece 909 is a light emitting / receiving method. The full tank switch 916 is in a state where the switch is not conducting (OFF) by entering between the floodlight and the receiver. On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with the balls, the bottom surface sway formed in the entire area on the upstream side of the front guide passage 920 and the reverse side guide passage 905. The bottom rocking plate 907 swings downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the ball stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection projecting piece 909 is thrown as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 115. The light-receiving type full-tan switch 916 is disconnected from the floodlight and the receiver, and the switch is in a conductive state (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational drive of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if an ON signal is derived while a predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls is delivered. Is paid out and then stopped).

As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is provided by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom surface of the passage where the ball flows down (in the case of the figure, the opposite side guidance passage 905). The 916 was operated, and the bottom rocking plate 907 was urged by an urging member (spring 913) so as to swing the bottom swing plate 907 when a certain amount of balls were placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of a part of the passage to detect a ball jam, the situation where the ball is not placed in a part of the passage is not detected due to the ball jam. It can be reliably prevented. This makes it possible to reliably detect the fullness of the sphere.

Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, since the full tank unit 900 is detachably attached to the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, the full tank device is formed on the main body frame as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled inside the payout passage. Further, by forming the inside of the full tank unit 900 into a zigzag-shaped passage, it is possible to guide the ball to the plate unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the ball paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The prize ball won will not jump out of the plate unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball weakens the momentum of the ball and joins in the middle of the front guidance passage 920 that pays out the prize ball. The foul balls can be merged without obstructing the flow of the balls.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 mounted in the vertical direction along the back end side of the main body frame 3 on the open side will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. FIG. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a structure for hooking the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. 119. Is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 1 cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. It is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the lock device 1000, and a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device 1000. ), The perspective views (B) and (C) of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, FIG. 123. Is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, FIG. 124 is a front view for explaining the operations of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and FIG. 125 is a fraud prevention member. It is a front view for demonstrating the operation of 1023, 1032.

The lock device 1000 is attached from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 117, is attached to the outer peripheral side of the main body frame 3. A plurality of (three in the figure) locking holes 548 formed in the middle and near the upper and lower ends between the rising portion of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540. The lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper part of the cylinder lock through hole 526 support the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, the locking device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It is composed of fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section and slidably providing a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame inside the metal. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device that is integrated on a substrate formed into an L-shaped cross section. This is because, as described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, so that the side wall 540 and the main body frame 3 Since the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small, the width dimension of the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment can be made small so that the lock device 1000 can be mounted on the back side of the main body frame 3. This is because it was improved as. Then, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is used for the door frame provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame have a fraud prevention structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered with the exception of the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively.

First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is penetrated is opened above and below the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001, and at the closed side. Side surface 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. A screw fixing portion 1003 is projected in the upper and middle directions in the horizontal direction, and the side surface 1001a that is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking protrusions 1004 are formed so as to project from the upper end portion and the intermediate portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the lock locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (Refer to FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 match in that state, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. Can be fixed. The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only in the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also in the upper vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fastening the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

Further, at the time of mounting the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped substrate 1001 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 for positioning and locking, and the U-shaped substrate 1001 is positioned and locked. The screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base 1001 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are provided in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front part of the lock device 1000 is locked with the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear part of the locking device 1000 is fixed with the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. Moreover, since the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 can be mounted on the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to the lock. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) at the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not come into close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixed structure of the rear portion are formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the first side surface wall 540. is there.

Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it in the stored state, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001. it can. That is, one each is formed in the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. By penetrating the rivet 1006 through the elongated rivet holes 1055 and 1061, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and as shown in FIG. 122 (C), for the door frame. The rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

Further, in the lower portion of the U-shaped substrate 1001, an fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed on the closed side surface thereof, and on the front end portion of the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side surface wall 540 of the main body frame 3 on the open side thereof. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is projected sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are further provided on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. In the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007, the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, which will be described later, moves forward and backward. This point will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510. The lock mounting piece 1008 is provided with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting the 1013 with the screws 1012 are bored at two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are bored.

Further, the insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening for the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 to enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032, and the escape horizontal hole 1022 constitutes an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Is. This point will be described in detail later.

The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 described above will be described. In the cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment substrate 1011 and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019, which protrudes from the rear surface of 1011. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end of the engagement cam 1016 is a first engagement projecting piece 1017 that engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. Then, in the cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009, and the mounting holes 1013 and the lock mounting piece 1008 are formed at two locations above and below the lock mounting board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by aligning the mounting holes 1014 with the mounting holes 1014 and screwing them with screws 1012.

Next, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the cylinder lock 1010 from being illegally lowered by a piano wire, a wire, or the like without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. .. Thus, the fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 has a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingably configured around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base 1001 described above. Of the insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 are used for attachment.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protrusion insertion hole 1026 that overlaps with the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 is inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026. It has become possible. That is, when the second engaging protrusion 1018 penetrates the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is designed to engage with the second engaging projectile piece 1018. Further, the outer line diagonally above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 abuts on the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, and the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are brought into contact with each other when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings around the swing shaft hole 1025 (in the clockwise rotation direction in FIG. 125 (B)).

Further, in the first fraud prevention member 1023, a stopper piece 1027 is projected on the outer line diagonally downward of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a regulating projecting piece 1031 is projected below the stopper piece 1027 to regulate. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are vertically formed in the front portion of the projecting piece 1031. When the stopper piece 1027 is locked, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is illegally engaged with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame by invading and engaging with the notch 1007 for preventing fraud and the engaging notch 1066 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. It is intended to prevent sliding on. Further, in the regulation projecting piece 1031, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and when they are connected by the spring 1035, the urging direction of the second fraud prevention member 1032. It regulates the movement to. The guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole 1029, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023 in a state where the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the vertical opening 1020. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end portion, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Further, the connecting hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with the connecting pin 1034.

The second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, a connecting hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is provided at the other end of the upper end. A stop hole 1036 is bored, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The connecting hole 1033 is for aligning with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and connecting with the connecting pin 1034, and the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base 1001 at one end. It locks the other end of the spring 1035 that is locked to 1021. Further, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing protrusion 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The actions of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 described above will be described in detail later.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof toward the front. It is projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when the door frame hook portion 1041 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame It protrudes forward from the door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed in No. 3 and locks to the hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be released.

Further, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet slot 1042 of the rivet slot 1042 is formed. A guide protrusion 1043 is projected below the 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rivet 1040. The elongated hole 1042 for the rivet is formed through the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. It is formed vertically long. Then, in the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 through. Further, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. And the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are guided to each other's sliding operation.

Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 formed on the upper hook member 1051. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. A contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape in the middle of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape by being punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped substrate 1001 for the door frame inside. This is to prevent the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. In the play hole 1044, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 moves so as not to interfere with the rotation operation. It constitutes a space that can be enjoyed. Further, the ascending engaging hole 1045 is engaged so that when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation. It is for doing. A relief notch 1049, which is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007, is formed behind the lower portion of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape cutout portion 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 in order to reliably engage the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066.

On the other hand, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It is composed of. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material made of metal is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward at the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion thereof, and in front of the hook portion 1056. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and a contact portion 1059 is formed on the upper side and the lower side thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing protrusion 38 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side, and the locking claw portion upwards. It is formed.

The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. , The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivet. As a result, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the projecting piece moving hole 1056 is inserted with the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame move each other. It is designed to guide you. As described above, the spring hook portion 1057 is engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the contact portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion thereof, and the elongated hole 1061 for rivets, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 project from above the plate surface portion. One-sided moving holes 1064 are sequentially formed, and a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the vertical side in front of the hole, and an engaging notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the vertical side behind the connecting hole 1060. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing protrusion 41 provided at the lower part inside the open side of the outer frame 2, and the locking claw portion upwards. It is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061. The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061.

As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. The lower engaging hole 1062 is engaged so that when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. belongs to. Further, in the play hole 1063, when the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the tip portion of the second engaging project piece 1018 is provided so as not to interfere with the rotation operation. It constitutes a space that can be moved. As described above, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 is inserted with the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are mutually moved. It is designed to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the contact portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for.

Although each member constituting the lock device 1000 has been described above, in order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. Then, in that state, the guide projecting piece 1043 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet slot 1042 and the rivet length are inserted. The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001. While inserting the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001. After that, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet elongated holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is shown in the pin hole 1029. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 with a screw that does not, and further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021, 1036 to prevent the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip portion is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While inserting into the hook hole 549, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction and the screw fixing By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 117. .. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the fixing structure of the above are formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the front portion is engaged. Compared with the case where the stop structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side surface wall 540, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling.

By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. There is. In this state, when a key (not shown in the drawing) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). , The tip of the first engaging projectile piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 that are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, the locking states of the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled toward the front side to release the main body frame. 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 124 (A)), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050, 1065 is the closing protrusions 38, 41. Since it comes into contact with the lower end portion of the main body frame, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and finally, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing protrusions 38 and 41 are locked again. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the ascending engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up and ascending the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. Therefore, the door frame 5 is pulled toward the front side by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a lowered state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 124 (A)), but the door frame is closed. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined to the hook cover 158. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward because it comes into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and finally, the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 158 are locked again in the door frame. The sliding door 1040 is lowered to return to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are forcibly opened and a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire is inserted between them. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In this case, a fraudulent act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the piano wire or the like may be performed without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Is prevented from committing such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 125. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are in contact with each other. It is in a state of contact. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 penetrates into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. Therefore, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engaging notch 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is used. It becomes impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is performed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is moved with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be opened.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. .. Therefore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main body prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally lowering only the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame cannot be performed.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is used for the door frame provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, the closed space of the illegal tool is provided by the side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is such that fraudulent activities cannot be easily carried out because the invasion of the building is prevented.

As described in detail above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment is used for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device whose width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is located below the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 can be mounted on the main body frame. It can be firmly attached to the back side of 3. Since the open side having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body provided inside are attached. Since the frame sliding door 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. It is not possible to easily perform fraudulent acts such as pulling down the frame sliding door 1050.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 for positioning and locking. The lock device 1000 has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the closed side (rear portion) are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws. The front part of the lock device 1000 is locked with the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear part of the locking device 1000 is fixed with the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

In the above embodiment, the screw fastening portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the screw fastening portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed in the vicinity of the upper portion as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is such that the lock mounting hole 547 is screwed together, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock mounting piece 1008 by using the screw 1012 that attaches the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008. The structure may be such that the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 simply by fixing the screwed portion 1003 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000 and the lock mounting hole 547. We have confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side which does not adhere to the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b which adheres to the first side wall 540 For the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame in the closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side surface wall 540 of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate). A structure for accommodating the sliding door 1050 may be used. Even in this case, the mounting structure and fraud prevention structure similar to those in the embodiment can be used.

[1-5. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the front side. 129 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the board unit, FIG. 130 is a front view seen from the front side of the frame board holder which is the main body of the board unit, and FIG. 131 is a frame. FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the payout control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. 134 is a rear view of the board unit. It is a plan view which shows the connection relationship of each board provided in a board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic view which shows the electrical connection between a board unit and a game board, and FIG. 136 is a payout control board and a board unit. It is a part of the rear view of the pachinko machine showing the wiring and the like, and FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is shown in FIGS. 76 to 80. It is a front view of a game board incorporating a removal prevention mechanism), and FIG. 138 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and is synthesized as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127. Various boards of the door relay board 1102, the power supply board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, the payout control board box 1105, the main drawer relay board 1107, and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are attached to the resin-molded frame board holder 1101. It is composed of. Among the above-mentioned boards, the door relay board 1102, the power supply board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are overlapped on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction and relay the main drawer. The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V, it is an extremely high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. Therefore, by mounting the payout control board box 1105 for accommodating the payout control board 1186 on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 in an overlapping manner, it is possible to avoid receiving the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipation plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 in order to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

The shield heat radiating plate 1106 in the present embodiment particularly dissipates heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 to the outside (outside air) as shown in FIGS. 127 and 129. The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. The heat transferred to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat radiating plate 1106 can be suppressed to a small value. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. Further, it is desirable that the uneven surface 1106a is formed in a vertical shape or an inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat radiating plate 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat radiating plate 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. As a result, the influence of noise due to electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, and therefore, malfunction of the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 due to the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 is provided not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105, but also when a plurality of other board boxes are overlapped with the frame board holder 1101. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat radiating plate 1106 as in the present embodiment between the substrate box located below the substrate box and the substrate box located above the substrate box.

First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long shape with a synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side portion on the rear surface side (right portion in FIG. 130). A recess 11110 for the relay board for mounting the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay board recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay board 1102, and the back surface of the door relay board 1102 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110. A contact protrusion 1113 for supporting the door relay board 1113 is projected, and a stop claw 1111 for locking with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 is formed in a state where the door relay board 1102 is housed in the recess 1111 for the relay board. ing. Further, above and below the relay board recess 1110 near the outside, mounting bosses 1112 for engaging with the engaging locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fastening with screws (not shown) are provided. It is projected.

Further, on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and gathering the wiring passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-mentioned relay board recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hooked between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper portion of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to the portion slightly closer to the other end side than the center serves as an area for mounting the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). A contact protrusion 1115 that comes into contact with the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 is provided on the upper and lower sides thereof. Therefore, when the power supply board box 1103 is mounted in the power supply board box mounting area so as to abut against the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame board holder 1101. Wiring that is formed and connects the substrates to each other is stored in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 lock and organize the stored wiring.

A large amount of protrusion to the rear is formed from the other end side of the region where the power supply board box 1103 is mounted to the other end side (left side in FIG. 130) of the frame board holder 1101. That is, the frame board holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape in which the left side is high and the right side is low at a position slightly to the left of the center when viewed from the back, and the low area on the right side is for mounting the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "power supply board box mounting area"). An insertion port 1115a into which the insertion protrusions 1134 projecting above and below the other end side of the power supply board box 1103 are inserted is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. Therefore, in order to mount the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion port 1115a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed above and below one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the mounting boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by inserting and fixing with a screw (not shown).

Further, on the back side of the frame board holder 1101, the above-mentioned high stepped area is one of the areas for mounting the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “payout control board box mounting area”). A portion is formed, and a horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the high stepped region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed on the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring is hooked on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting area. It is designed to be pulled out from the wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. Further, on the other end side (left end side in FIG. 127) of the payout control board box mounting area, a locking protrusion 1117 for engaging the engaging elastic piece 1184 of the payout control board box 1105 is formed so as to project. ing.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball passage 1119 is inverted at substantially the center of the front side of the frame board holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out ball passage 1119 is upward so as to correspond to the above-mentioned out port 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball ejection discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 75). Is widely formed, and the downstream side is narrowly formed so as to discharge spheres in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is located behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, the out ball, the winning ball, or the ball pulling ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, the recovery gutter of the island).

Further, on the front side of the frame board holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the lateral direction in the upper area thereof. A drawer mounting area 1120 that is vacant and mounted in parallel is formed. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and respectively. Joining guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are bored above and below the intermediate positions of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 are the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) and the game board 4 provided on the board unit 1100 side as a result of the work of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3. A joint guide protrusion 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board holder 623 of the game board 4 is inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. It is a thing. On the other hand, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) projecting from the main body frame 3 when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3. The purpose is to perform positioning and facilitate the mounting work. Further, mounting pieces 1122 for mounting the board unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame board holder 1101, and the mounting pieces 1122 are mounted on the mounting holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The substrate unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with a screw (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the mounting hole portion 527 is formed to have an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122. Further, a wiring hook piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed so as to project from the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame board holder 1101.

The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, but the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted on the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has an internal connection terminal of a multi-pin connector type. A 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be visually recognized from the outside even when all the boards are attached to the frame board holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. Door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an illuminated component or a speaker composed of lamps and LEDs is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through a wiring opening 1124. Further, the internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to the door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by the internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame board holder 1101 so that the above-mentioned wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

Further, the power supply board box 1103 attached to the power supply board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 is a cover body that covers the box main body 1132 for fixing the power supply board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and the box main body 1132. It is composed of 1133 and. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with engaging locking holes 1135 that engage with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and insertion protrusions 1134 inserted into the insertion port 1115a are integrally formed above and below the other end portion. Is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the power switch 1137, the power line connector 1138, the CR unit power connector 1139, and the grounding portion of the power board 1136 not covered by the cover body 1133 (right side and lower left in FIG. 133). A connector 1140 and a power supply connector 1141 for a payout control board are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all the electric devices of the pachinko machine 1, and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. Further, the power supply line connector 1138 connects the power supply wiring from the AC 24V (AC24V) power supply wiring supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending device (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Various ground wires for preventing static electricity provided in the pachinko machine 1 are electrically connected to the ground connector 1140, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 is grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector for Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a ball flowing down the tank rail member 740. The ground wire for removing noise and the like is electrically connected to the grounding connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the grounding wire for removing noise and the like from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the grounding connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. , A ground wire that removes noise and the like from the CR unit is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame grounds of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the frame grounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, the power supply wiring 1214 allows the liquid crystal control board 3281 housed in the peripheral board box 622 and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is guided from the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board to the wiring routing space 1116, is pulled out rearward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105, and is connected to the power supply terminal 1192. There is. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame board holder 1101.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and the region having a high step is a mounting area 1142 for mounting the terminal board box 1104. The low area is the mounting area 1143 for mounting the payout control board box 1105. The mounting area 1143 together with the above-mentioned payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 constitutes a mounting area for mounting the horizontally long payout control board box 1105. An engagement hole 1146 in which the engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is engaged and inserted is formed at substantially the center of the step portion.

The cover body 1133 constituting the mounting area 1142 for mounting the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104 and a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the engaging piece 1147, respectively. And the mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engaging piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the mounting engaging hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which a wide portion and a narrow portion are continuous, so that the engaging piece portion 1147 is mounted. After inserting it into the wide part of the engaging hole 1144, it is slid in one direction (in the case of the figure, toward the center of the frame board holder 1101) to move the L-shaped engaging piece 1147 and the mounting engaging hole. It is adapted to engage with the narrow portion of 1144. A hook piece 1149 is projected from the lower portion of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the hook piece 1149 is paid out. It is designed to engage with a part of the box main body 1180. It should be noted that this engagement is in an engaged state in which the terminal board box 1104 is easily disengaged by sliding and moving the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engaging direction with a slight force.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the terminal board box 1104 includes an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and a payout control board terminal 1156, a frequency display terminal 1152, and a power supply ground terminal 1153. Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. The plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal plate 1150a provide various information signals necessary for managing the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start port winning information output signal to the outside (for example, in a game hall). It is a connector for deriving to a certain management computer (hall computer)), and those information signals are mainly from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. It is transmitted to the payout control board 1186 via the payout control board 1186, and is finally transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connecting the external terminal board terminal 1188 provided on the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1156. To. The frequency display terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal plate 1150b is connected to the wiring of the pachinko machine 1, for example, the remaining frequency display of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300, the ball rental switch, and the return switch. .. Further, the power supply ground terminal 1153 is composed of two connectors, one connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power supply connector 1139 of the power supply board 1136, and the other connector is connected to the power supply board 1136. The wiring from the grounding connector 1140 of one of the plurality of grounding connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to the wiring from the CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. , The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit will be connected.

As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a that derives the game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, the payout control board 1186, and the CR unit. Both boards of the CR unit terminal board 1150b to be relayed are housed, and these are conventionally housed in separate board boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In the above, the terminal board box 1104 is put together and mounted on the frame board holder 1101. Therefore, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are not directly connected by wiring, but have a unique configuration in which they are connected via the payout control board 1186.

Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is mainly shown in FIGS. 127, 129 and FIGS. It will be described with reference to 132. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 in which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board 1186 is fixed by screws or the like (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186. It is composed of. One side of the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 (the right side in FIG. 132) are engaged with each other, and the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) is caulked and fixed by a separation cutting portion 1183. As a result, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cutting portion 1183 must be cut before the separation can be performed. However, the caulking fixing in the separation cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (4 locations indicated by the numbers 1 to 4 in the figure) with a caulking member, for example, separating by inspection or the like. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of fraudulent separation, the trace of cutting will remain, so it is possible to immediately know whether or not there was fraudulent activity. Further, an engaging piece 1182 inserted into the engaging hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed so as to project from the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and is formed at the lower portion of the other side short side. An engaging elastic piece 1184 that elastically engages with the locking protrusion 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Easy to install. When the payout control board box 1105 is mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, the payout control board box 1105 is within the mounting area 1143. The payout control board box 1105 is housed in the box and is fixed so that it cannot be moved in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing it, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking protrusion 1117, and the payout control board box 1105 is pulled up. By pulling out the engaging piece 1182 from the engaging hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

Further, the payout control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (right side in FIG. 132). , Award ball unit terminal 1187, external terminal board terminal 1188, CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, operation handle terminal 1194, error LED display 4130, error release switch 4131, ball removal switch 4132, etc. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a launch motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (left side in FIG. 132).

The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which the wiring from the door frame opening switch 4133 for detecting that the door frame 5 has been released from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame release switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which the wiring from the main body frame release switch 4134 that detects that the main body frame 3 has been released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which the wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the status of the pachinko machine such as a CR unit connection abnormality. When the error release switch 4131 is operated, guidance on the release method according to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391. When the ball removal switch 4132 is operated, the ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 starts to be discharged (ball removal starts). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when inspecting the payout control board 1186, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. As described above, the power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power supply connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the ball launching device 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided inside the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

As shown in FIG. 132, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged in the vicinity of the left side of the error release switch 4131. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are grounded (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) invades various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is intended to prevent instability, and a detailed explanation thereof will be described later.

Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub-drawer relay board 1108 to be mounted on the drawer mounting area 1120 formed on the front surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to the main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back surface side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder-side connector) and a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided above and below. Further, the sub-drawer relay board 1108 has a sub-drawer relay connector 1202 connected to a sub-drawer connector 627 (game board-side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back surface side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector), the internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102, and the door frame connector 1203 connected via the internal wiring 1213 are provided at the top and bottom. Further, in the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108, support holes 1204 and 1205 are bored on both left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are projected from the drawer mounting area 1120 to the drawer mounting boss. By inserting it into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub-drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then covered with the board cover 1109 to be firmly fixed.

By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. A rectangular connector opening 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 is opened for projecting to the outside of the board cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the board cover 1109. An insertion hole 1210 (see FIG. 127) is formed, and a stop hole 1211 for fixing the board cover 1109 to the frame board holder 1101 with a screw (not shown) is formed at both left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 projecting from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub-drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while inserting the board and fixing the stop hole 1211 with a screw (not shown).

The configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, but in the case of the present embodiment, among the various boards required for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board is replaced with the change of the game board 4. Door relay board 1102 which is a board other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 3281, the power supply board 1136 stored in the power supply board box 1103, the external terminal board 1150 housed in the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105. The payout control board 1186 is assembled into a unit by pre-assembling it to the frame board holder 1101, and the board unit 1100 which is assembled and unitized is attached to the lower part of the back side of the main body frame 3, and the main bodies are conventionally separated. The work efficiency can be improved as compared with the various board mounting work mounted on the back side of the frame 3. Further, in this case, since the wiring between the boards unitized in the board unit 1100 can also be stored inside the frame board holder 1101, the wiring connecting the boards is not disturbed and laid in an orderly manner. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main drawer relay board 1107 having the main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder-side connector) and the sub-drawer relay board 1108 having the sub-drawer relay connector 1202 (holder-side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100. As shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side thereof. Since the 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and the sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), the game board 4 can be mounted and the boards can be connected to each other. Can be done at the same time. Therefore, the replacement work of the game board 4 can be performed efficiently.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the board unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the payout control board box 1105, which requires connection work of wiring with various electric devices provided in the main body frame 3, and an external The terminal board box 1104, which requires connection work with the CR unit and the management computer, is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it is easy to see, while the power supply board requires less connection work with the outside. Since the box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of boards can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the board unit 1100 can be minimized. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal parts connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so there is a problem that the connection work thereof becomes fumbling. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between the board unit and the game board (connection by drawer connector)]
Next, the electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As described above, the contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. 135 (c). Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are connected to each other by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals is formed. Further, a voltage supply line for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136 is further formed in the drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side. By detachably attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in this way, the control signal line and voltage by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. The supply line can be connected freely.

The terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a in the present embodiment are bellows type. The pin type may inadvertently touch the pin and bend during work, but the bellows type does not. Further, gold plating having a small friction coefficient is used for plating the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. As a result, the slipperiness (good fitting) when the game board 4 is attached / detached is ensured.

Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the work is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 turned on, the contact point between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, the contact point 1200a. Since a large current (inrush current, which will be described later) flows through the contacts for various voltage supply lines, welding will occur. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 in this welded state to be attached, the contact 1200a may be bent and broken, or when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame, the contact 1200a is the drawer connector 1200. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used because it is peeled off and damaged.

Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded together, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the damage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100, which will be described later. The detailed explanation will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with the prize ball unit, etc.]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. As described above, the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit includes a counting switch connector 830a, a payout motor connector 830b, a rotation angle switch connector 830c, a ball break switch connector 830d, a ground connector 830e, and a payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

The wiring from the counting switch 812 is connected to the counting switch connector 830a, the wiring from the payout motor 815 is connected to the payout motor connector 830b, and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855 is connected to the rotation angle switch connector 830c. The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wiring from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

With the wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the terminal 1187 for the prize ball unit, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855. The harness is tied up by a wiring processing piece 869.

As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball passage unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and become charged, they electrostatically discharge and generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is easily affected by noise and is in an environment.

As described above, the sensor board 854 of the prize ball unit 800 is provided with the rotation angle switch 855, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Further, the harness for connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness for connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 70, 74 and the like. The cover body 1250 covers the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at three locations above, middle, and lower on one side thereof. The shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engaging piece 1252 that engages with the cover body engaging groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Then, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so that the engaging piece 1252 can be inserted into the cover body engaging groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back surfaces of various parts provided on the game board 4 can be protected. When opening the cover, the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be disengaged.

Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, stop holes 1253 are formed above and below the engaging piece 1252 on the open side, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 projecting from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in more detail, an opening 1255 for connection operation, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed as in the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment described below. Has been done. The connection operation opening 1255, the vertical wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same positions as the connection operation opening 1303, the vertical wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It has the same function. Then, with the cover body 1250 closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are aligned and fastened with a screw (not shown), so that the cover body 1250 causes the main body frame 3 to be fixed. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Then, since the protruding hook piece 570 for locking penetrates the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked with the protruding hook piece 570 for locking. By hooking on the padlock, only the person in charge with the padlock key can open the cover body 1250.

[1-6A. Other embodiments of the cover body]
As is clear from FIG. 5, the cover body 1250 shown in FIGS. 5 and 74 (hereinafter, referred to as “cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter, referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 150. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached and viewed from the back in a state where the cover body is opened, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view in which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. It is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached and viewed from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached and viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body, and FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a state where the cover body according to the second embodiment is removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of a payout control board box that overlaps and contacts the lower side portion of the cover body according to the second embodiment. 146 is a perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 147 is a back surface for explaining the operation of the cylinder lock provided on the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 148 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 143. In addition, in FIGS. 139 to 150, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations having the same functions as the configurations displayed in the drawings before that.

As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, and is attached to the door frame 5. The shape of the plate unit 300 provided is also slightly different. Further, the structure of the main body frame 3 also includes a stop hole 568, which will be described later, formed on the open end side of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side, a point of the locking wall 569 having the locking hole 569a and the guide hole 569b (see FIG. 144), and The difference is that the positions of the notches 221 of the third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 constituting the rear side wall extend downward (see FIG. 140), and the payout control board box 1105 The configuration also differs only in that the contact low step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIGS. 139 and 144 is attached to the board board holder 623 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 in the same manner as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 78. In 139 and FIG. 144, the illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

Therefore, first, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146. The cover body 1300 is formed of synthetic resin in a dish shape in which the side walls around a slightly elongated rectangular shape are raised (a large number of air holes are formed in the side wall portion and the upper half of the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (4 in the case of the drawing) shaft support pins 1301 that are inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed in the main body frame 3 and are pivotally supported are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side. An engaging piece 1302 that engages with the cover body engaging groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is integrally formed slightly above the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. The shaft support pin 1301 and the engaging piece 1302 form the cover body 1300 by inserting the shaft support pin 1301 of the cover body 1300 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, similarly to the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the frame 3 so as to be openable and closable and locking the engaging piece 1302 to the cover body engaging groove 785, which is provided on the game board 4. It is possible to protect the back surface of various parts including the main control board box 624. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not only provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be opened illegally in the closed state. A test terminal for connecting the RAM clear switch 624a provided on the main control board box 624 to the outside and the inspection device because the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the main control board box 1309 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered. It hits the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 with the connection operation opening 1303 provided at the position corresponding to 624b and 624c and the tip end side of the side wall of the lower side of the cover body 1300 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, the characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to these second embodiments will be described below.

First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape on the upper part of the contact lower side wall 1306 on the lower side of the cover body 1300, and its size is as shown in FIG. 143. The RAM clear switch 624a provided on the main control board box 624 so as to be exposed to the outside and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection equipment is connected are provided in a size facing each other. Further, inside the connection operation opening 1303, a vertical wall 1304 and a contact projection 1305 that abut on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state are provided so as to project. The vertical wall 1304 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the abutting projection 1305 projects relatively low along the one-side opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the vertical wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent a gap from being formed between the main control board box 624 and the main control board box 624, an unauthorized tool is inserted through the connection operation opening 1303 so that an unauthorized act cannot be performed on the main control board box 624.

Next, the contact lower side wall surface 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall surface 1306 is shown in FIGS. 149 and 150. As described above, the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact with the upper side portion. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145, the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 mounted on the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is attached. The contact low step surface 1181a, which is formed lower than the surface, is formed. As shown in FIG. 144, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is formed on the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103. In the state of being mounted over the mounting area 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the mounting area 1143 and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. Therefore, the contact low step surface 1181a, which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105, is contact-covered by the contact lower side wall surface 1306 of the cover body 1300, so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

Next, the configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an elliptical lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the lower side of the cover body 1300. A screw portion 1310 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 1309 is penetrated through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 to the lock hole 1308. Further, in the cylinder lock 1309, a lock shaft 1311 is projected from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is formed in the lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by penetrating it through the hole 1314 and tightening it with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the lock piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting a key (owned by the manager of the amusement park, etc.) into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating it. There is. Further, at the lower part of the lock hole 1308, a guide protrusion 1316 for guiding the opening / closing when closing the cover body 1300 is projected inward. Further, a screw fixing hole 1307 is formed above and below the engagement piece 1302 on the open side of the cover body 1300 for screwing screws.

On the other hand, a stop hole 568, a lock hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the screw fixing hole 1307, the locking piece 1313, and the guide protrusion 1316 described above. Explaining this configuration with reference to FIG. 144, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed on the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 as described above, and the cover body contact groove is formed. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw fixing holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower parts of 567 (upper and lower sides of the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the direction of the vertical center line of the main body frame 3 in the lower portion of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569 is extended. Locking holes 569a and guide holes 569b are provided above and below the above. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 penetrates through the locking hole 569a, and the locking wall 569 around the front surface side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

Then, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the lock piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked while the guide protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b as shown in FIG. 147 (A). It is in a state of penetrating the hole 569a. By inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating it in that state, the lock piece 1313 is rotated 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 147 (B), and one end of the lock piece 1313 is with the front side of the lock wall 569. Engage. Therefore, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, the screwed holes that match in the closed state in order to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3 By screwing a screw (not shown) into the 1307 and the stop hole 568, the upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3. A cylinder lock may also be provided above the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder locks at the top and bottom.

Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of the present embodiment, after the discharge port 730). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 are the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely neat. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, the overall thickness is uniform. Since it is easy to grasp, it is easy to load and stack, and even when actually installing it on the island stand of the amusement park, it protrudes to the back of the opponent's pachinko machine on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the back row. It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring to be used. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment also has the same effect as shown in FIG.

In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is that the cover body 1300 is the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, if the closed state is held only at the center of the cover body 1300, the upper and lower parts may be deformed by heat, so that the upper and lower parts are closed. It is configured to hold. The second reason is that, as described above, the contact lower side wall surface 1306 of the cover body 1300 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the payout control board box 1105, so that the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 cannot be pried open. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower portion of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper portion of the cover body 1300 must also be closed. Then, for this second reason, a locking device such as a cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, but a locking device that can be unlocked only by the manager of the amusement park) may be used in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion. ) Is desirable.

Although the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has a lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the contact lower side wall 1306 is designed to contact and cover the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101, the payout control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101. Since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, not only fraudulent acts against the main control board box 624 covered with the cover body 1300 but also fraudulent acts against the payout control board box 1105 not covered with the cover body 1300 are prevented. be able to. Further, even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when the software or the like runs out of control and recovers. A vertical wall 1304 and an abutting protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the back surface of the game board 4 by inserting a piano wire or the like.

Further, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has the same vertical surface as the rear end portion of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 when viewed from the side in the closed state. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely neat, and the overall thickness when transporting the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Since it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and stack, and even when actually installing it on the island stand of the amusement park, on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the back row, the back of the opponent's pachinko machine. It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring that protrudes from the machine.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally right front, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally left front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the left rear, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the disassembled one seen diagonally rearward. It is a perspective view seen from.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and has a frame-shaped front component 601 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game ball is driven. And the game panel 600 arranged so as to close the game area 605 on the rear side of the front component 601 and on the front side of the game panel 600 arranged on the upper side of the out port 606 at substantially the center in the left-right direction in the game area 605. A supported start port unit 2000, an electric winning port unit 2100 arranged on the right side of the start port unit 2000 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and arranged along the outer circumference of the game area 605 on the left side of the start port unit 2000. The side winning opening unit 2200 supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, the gate unit 2300 arranged on the right side of the electric winning opening unit 2100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 605. A frame-shaped center accessory 2400 supported by the game panel 600, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and visible from the player side through the frame of the game panel 600 and the center accessory 2400. It mainly includes a liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means that can be attached and display a predetermined effect image and broadcast information. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 600 will be described in detail.

[2-1. Starting port unit]
First, the starting port unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of each device mounted on the game panel disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the starting port unit viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 159. Is a perspective view of the starting port unit disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the start port unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game panel 600, and then the game panel 600 It is fixed to the front of the. The starting port unit 2000 includes a plurality of receiving ports (winning openings) in which a game ball driven into the game area 605 can be received. As the plurality of receiving ports, a first starting port 2001 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction and a special winning opening 2010b arranged below the first starting port 2001 are provided.

The configuration of the start port unit 2000 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, the start port unit 2000 has a start port base plate 2010 fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 and a first start port 2001 at the upper end on the front surface of the start port base plate 2010. By being attached, the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 is sent into the upper opening 2010a of the start port base plate 2010, and the game that has entered the first start port 2001. It is equipped with a first start port sensor 2012 that detects a ball.

Further, in the lower part of the starting port base plate 2010, a special winning opening 2010b penetrating in the front-rear direction and a game ball rolling in the game areas 605 on both sides of the special winning opening 2010b are received, and in front of the special winning opening 2010b. A pair of guide portions 2010c for guiding are formed. A front cover 2010 arranged so as to shield the front of the special winning opening 2010b is provided on the front side of the pair of guide portions 2010c, and the game ball received by the guide portion 2010c can be seen from the front of the guide portion 2010c. It is configured so that it is not discharged. Further, on the rear side of the base plate 2101, a special winning portion 2015 whose tip is arranged so as to face the special winning opening 2010b is provided. The special winning portion 2015 is capable of receiving a game ball passing in front of the special winning opening 2010b, and has a tubular front base member 2016 extending in the front-rear direction and a rear base arranged on the rear side. A member 2017, a tongue-shaped infestation piece 2018 supported so as to be able to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction in the front base member 2016, a solenoid 2019 arranged in the rear base member 2017, and a plunger (not shown) of the solenoid 2019. It is configured to include a link mechanism (not shown) that transmits movement to the tongue-shaped infestation piece 2018 and moves the tongue-shaped infestation piece 2018 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the tongue-shaped haunting piece 2018 protrudes forward from the front surface of the front base member 2016 (that is, the special winning opening 2010b), it is possible to catch the passing game ball and allow the ball to enter the inside of the front base member 2016. On the other hand, when the tongue-shaped infestation piece 2018 is immersed in the front base member 2016 (that is, when the tip of the tongue-shaped infestation piece 2018 is located behind the special winning opening 2010b), the game ball can be inserted. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

Further, a base plate lens portion 2021 having a decoration is fitted on the lower side of the starting port base plate 2010 than the special winning opening 2010b, and is arranged on the lower rear side of the starting mouth base plate 2010. The light emitting substrate 2022 is designed to emit light.

[2-2. Electric winning opening unit]
The electric winning opening unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 157, 160, and 161. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the electric winning opening unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the electric winning opening unit disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front. As shown in FIG. 157, the electric winning opening unit 2100 is formed in the lower portion of the game panel 600 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction to the opening 600e formed on the right side of the opening 600e into which the starting opening unit 2000 is inserted and fixed. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 of the electric winning opening unit 2100, the electric winning opening unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving ports (winning devices) in which a game ball driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the general entry port 2102 having the general winning opening 2102a, the second starting opening unit 2103 having the second starting opening 2002 arranged below the general entering portion 2102, and the second starting opening 2002. It is provided with an attacker unit 2104 which is arranged on the lower side and has a rectangular large winning opening 2003 which is largely extended in the left-right direction from the general winning opening 2102a and the second starting opening 2002.

The general ball entry portion 2102 is arranged in the upper end notch portion 2101a of the base plate 2101, and can always accept (enter) a game ball from the general winning opening 2102a on the upper surface. On the other hand, the second starting port 2002 arranged below the general ball entry portion 2102 is formed by a pair of blades 2106 that can be expanded between the general ball entry portion 2102 and the pair of blades 2106. In the vertically standing state, the general ball entry portion 2102 and the pair of blades 2106 make the game ball unacceptable to the second starting port 2002, whereas the blade drive mechanism 2107 causes the pair of blades 2106 to move in the left-right direction. In the state of being expanded to (the state shown in FIG. 160), the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2002. That is, the second starting port 2002 is a variable winning port by a pair of blades 2106. The pair of blades 2106 are opened and closed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302 of the gate unit 2300, which will be described later. Further, the pair of blades 2106 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 2101b formed on the upper side of the base plate 2101, and the lower side is covered by the ball entry portion 2105 whose front surface is closed, so that the second start The game ball that has won the prize in the mouth 2002 is guided by the ball entry portion 2105 and sent to the opening 2101b. Further, the blade drive mechanism 2107 is connected to the start port solenoid 2109 supported by the solenoid box 2108 and the plunger 2110 of the start port solenoid 2109, and causes the plunger 2110 to move in the front-rear direction to rotate (open / close) the pair of blades 2106. It is provided with a link member 2111 that converts into motion.

On the other hand, the attacker unit 2104 includes an upper case 2114 and a lower case 2115 having a large winning opening 2003 on the front surface and a passage for a game ball formed inside, and the large winning opening 2003 is located at the lower part of the base plate 2101. It is arranged so as to face the formed horizontally elongated rectangular window portion 2101c. Further, the large winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular winning door 2113 whose opening can be closed. The lower side of the winning door 2113 is rotatably supported by the door shaft 2116, and in a substantially vertical state (the state shown in FIG. 160), the large winning opening 2003 is closed to make the game ball unacceptable, and the upper side When the player rotates so as to incline forward, the large winning opening 2003 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted. The winning door 2113 is in a state where the large winning opening 2003 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is accepted (starting winning) into the first starting port 2001 and the second starting opening 2002, and the lottery is performed. It opens and closes by driving the big winning opening solenoid 2437 (see FIG. 191) according to the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is "big hit"). In the upper case 2114, a relay board 2117 that relays a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2109 and the like and a second start port sensor 2349 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2002 are provided. There is.

[2-3. Side winning opening unit]
The side winning opening unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 162. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the side winning opening unit as viewed diagonally from the front. The side winning opening unit 2200 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the starting opening unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower part of the game panel 600 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. After that, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. The side winning opening unit 2200 has a side base plate 2201 formed in an arc shape in the front view and fixed to the game panel 600, and a lens and a light emitting substrate (neither shown) arranged inside the side base plate 2201 arranged in the upper part of the front surface. The state display unit 2202 to be held, three general winning openings 2203 arranged in the lower part of the front surface of the side base plate 2201 and capable of entering a game ball rolling in the game area 605, and the decoration arranged in front of the side base plate 2201. It is configured to include a plurality of lenses 2204 and decoration 2205. Further, on the rear surface of the side base plate 2201, a light emitting substrate 2206 that emits and decorates the lens 2204 and the decoration 2205 by projecting light through an opening (not shown) formed in the side base plate 2201 is a substrate. It is attached by cover 2207. The state display unit 2202 protrudes into the game area 605, and it is possible to roll the game ball that has flowed down on the upper surface of the state display unit 2202 toward the general winning opening 2203. Further, the general winning opening 2203 protrudes into the game area 605 and the upper side is open, so that a game ball rolling in the game area 605 can always be accepted (winning).

[2-4. Gate unit]
The gate unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 163. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the gate unit viewed diagonally from the front. The gate unit 2300 is inserted into the game panel 600 from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed on the right side of the opening 600e into which the electric winning opening unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, and then the game panel 600 is inserted. It is fixed to the front. As shown in FIG. 163, the gate unit 2300 includes a gate base plate 2301 having a gate 2300a having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball arranged in the gate base plate 2301 and passing through the gate 2300a. It is equipped with a gate sensor 2302 for detecting. Further, on the right side of the gate base plate 2301, a base plate lens portion 2304 capable of transmitting light is provided, and further, a bullet hole type lens 2305 and a decorative portion 2306 are provided on the front surface thereof, and these are base plate lenses. Light is projected from the light emitting substrate 2307 arranged on the rear side of the portion 2304 and supported by the substrate cover 2308 to provide light emission decoration.

[2-5. Center role]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 157, 164 and 165. FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each component and viewed diagonally from the front. As shown in FIG. 157, the center accessory 2400 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the size occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. Here, the game panel 600 corresponds to the game board of the present invention, and the center accessory 2400 corresponds to the center frame of the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the center accessory 2400 includes a frame-shaped base plate 2401, a main lens base 2402 attached from the upper front side to the right side of the base plate 2401, and the front side of the base plate 2401. It is equipped with a left lens base 2403 installed on the upper left. On the front side of the main lens base 2402, a plurality of character-shaped lenses 2404 shaped into a predetermined character shape, an outer peripheral decorative member 2405 arranged on the front surface of the outer peripheral portion of the character-shaped lens 2404, and a handcuff-shaped shape are formed. A handcuff-shaped decorative body 2406 and a segment display unit 2409 capable of displaying numbers and the like in 7 segments are arranged. Further, a left decorative portion 2407 is arranged on the front surface of the left lens base 2403, and a game ball that rolls in the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2400 can flow into the center accessory 2400. A warp entrance 2408 is also provided. Further, a substrate cover 2411 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2401, and by irradiating light from the light emitting substrates 2412 and 2413 supported by the substrate cover 2411 through the main lens base 2402 or the left lens base 2403. , The character-shaped lens 2404, the outer peripheral decorative member 2405, the handcuff-shaped decorative body 2406, the left decorative portion 2407, and the like can be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, on the lower side of the base plate 2401, a stage front plate 2417 attached to the front side of the base plate 2401, a stage 2420 attached to the rear surface side of the base plate 2401, and a stage rear plate 2421 are arranged. A warp passage member 2423 connecting the warp inlet portion 2408 and the left end of the stage 2420 is arranged on the left side portion of the base plate 2401. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the base plate 2401 through the warp inlet portion 2408 and the warp passage member 2423 can be rolled in the left-right direction by the arc-shaped stage 2420. In the stage 2420, the rolled game ball can be discharged from the center of the stage 2420 in the left-right direction or its vicinity to the game area 605 above the first starting port 2001. In particular, a chance entrance 2402a is formed in the central portion of the stage 2420, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2402a is sent to the chance exit 2418a formed in the lower decoration 2418, which will be described later. Here, the warp passage member 2423 corresponds to the warp passage of the present invention.

The lower decoration 2418 is arranged below the stage front plate 2417 and is attached to the lower front side of the base plate 2401. Behind the lower decoration 2418, a reflector 2419 attached to the rear surface side of the base plate 2401 and a light emitting substrate 2422 supported by the stage rear plate 2421 are provided, and an opening from the light emitting substrate 2422 to the reflector 2419. By projecting light onto the lower decoration 2418 through the lower decoration 2418, a plurality of lighting portions 2418b are formed on the lower decoration 2418. Further, by controlling the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting sources (not shown) mounted on the light emitting board 2422, the number of lighting units 2418b is lit and displayed according to the number of pending jackpot lottery. ..

Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 166 to 190. FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 167 is a perspective view of each main component of the back unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 168 is a character decoration unit. Is a perspective view seen from diagonally front, and FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the character decoration unit disassembled for each member and viewed from diagonally front. Further, FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the revolving light unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the revolving light unit disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front. Further, FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the upper left movable decoration unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the upper left movable decoration unit disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 174 is a perspective view. , The upper pistol unit is disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the lower left movable decorative unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 176 shows the lower left movable decorative unit for each member. FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the lower movable decorative unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the lower movable decorative unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 178 disassembles the lower movable decorative unit for each member. It is a perspective view seen from diagonally front.

Further, FIG. 179 is a perspective view of a part of the back unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 180 is a perspective view of a part of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed diagonally from the front. 181 is a perspective view of the back box viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 182 is a perspective view of the upper space forming unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the upper space forming unit for each member. FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the lower space forming unit and the support box as viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the lower space forming unit and the support box. Is a perspective view seen diagonally from the front by disassembling each member. Further, FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the display unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the display unit disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front. Further, FIG. 188 is a front view of the game board showing the operating state of each movable decorative unit, FIG. 189 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the player side on the right side of the adjacent seat, and FIG. 190 is a perspective view of the game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the player side on the left side.

As shown in FIGS. 155, 166 and 167, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and is mainly separated from the game panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance in the back box 3001. The liquid crystal display device 1400 supported at the position, the character decoration unit 3002 arranged in the upper space of the back box 3001, the rotating light unit 3003 arranged further above the character decoration unit 3002, and the left side of the rotating light unit 3003. The upper left movable decoration unit 3004 arranged in, the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 arranged on the right side of the rotating light unit 3003, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the liquid crystal display device 1400. A lower right movable decoration unit 3007 arranged on the right side and a lower movable decoration unit 3008 arranged below the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and behind the stage rear plate 2421 (see FIG. 164) are provided. It is configured. The lower left movable decoration unit 3006 and the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 are shielded by a pair of shielding members 3010 attached from the front. Here, the character decoration unit 3002 corresponds to the second decorative body of the present invention, and the lower movable decorative unit 3008 corresponds to the lower movable decorative body of the present invention.

First, the character decoration unit 3002 will be described in detail. The character decoration unit 3002 is arranged above the liquid crystal display device 1400, has a length in the left-right direction larger than the width of the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and is closer to the player side (that is, forward than the display screen 1400a). ) Is placed so far out. That is, as shown in FIG. 166, when the back unit 3000 is viewed from diagonally above, the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is blocked by the character decoration unit 3002, and the effect image displayed on the display screen 1400a is visually recognized. Has become difficult. As shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the character decoration unit 3002 includes a mouth member 3015 formed by imitating a part of the character's face (specifically, a nose and cheek part) and a mouth member 3015. It is provided with a light-transmitting eye member 3016 incorporated in the upper part and shaped to imitate the character's eyes, and a hat member 3017 incorporated in the upper part of the eye member 3016 and shaped to imitate the character's hat. ing.

Further, the character decoration unit 3002 accommodates a pair of light guide lenses 3018 inside the eye member 3016, and a light emitting substrate 3022 supported by a substrate cover 3021 on the rear side of the mouth member 3015 and the eye member 3016. Are arranged. The pair of light guide lenses 3018 are supported by a light transmitting lens base 3020, and the light projected from the light emitting substrate 3022 is irradiated to the inner surface of the eye member 3016 through the lens base 3020 and the pair of light guide lenses 3018. It has become so. That is, the entire light-transmitting eye member 3016 is configured to be light-emitting and decorated by the light projected from the light-emitting substrate 3022. Further, below the pair of light guide lenses 3018, a reflector 3019 that limits the light projection direction is provided so that the light projected from the light emitting substrate 3022 does not irradiate the oral member 3015 side. Further, on the rear surface side of the substrate cover 3021, a pair of decorative members 3023 arranged on both left and right sides of the hat member 3017 and an irradiation substrate 3024 that illuminates these decorative members 3023 from diagonally below are provided.

Next, the revolving light unit 3003 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the revolving light unit 3003 emits red light radially with the vertical direction as the axial direction, and the bottom surface is opened and a circular opening 3030a is formed on the upper surface. It is configured to include a box-shaped base member 3030, a lamp front cover 3031 arranged above the base member 3030 and divided into two front and rear parts, and a lamp rear cover 3032. The lamp front cover 3031 and the lamp rear cover 3032 are formed of a light-transmitting red member, and when combined, have a dome shape having an accommodation space inside. Inside the pair of covers 3031 and 3032, a light guide tube 3035 that emits light and a reflector that limits the radiation direction of the light radiated from the light guide tube 3035 and changes the radiation direction over time by rotating. 3034 and are housed. That is, the reflector 3034 is formed with an opening 3034a through which the light guide tube 3035 is inserted in the center, and an arc-shaped limiting plate 3034b that limits the radiation direction of light is erected from the upper surface. Further, the reflector 3034 is supported by a reflector pedestal 3033 having an opening 3033a formed in the center, and a projection piece 3033b formed on the outer peripheral edge of the reflector pedestal 3033 is detected by a photo sensor 3042 to determine the rotation position of the reflector 3034. It is possible to detect.

Further, inside the base member 3030, as a drive mechanism for rotating the reflector pedestal 3033 and the reflector 3034, the motor 3037 supported by the motor base 3036 and the rotation shaft of the motor 3037 inserted into the through hole 3036a of the motor base 3036. The motor gear 3038 connected to the motor gear 3038, the relay gear 3040 meshed with the motor gear 3038 and rotatably supported by the shaft pin 3039, meshed with the relay gear 3040, and passed through the circular opening 3030a of the base member 3030 to the reflector pedestal 3033. It is equipped with a connected transmission gear 3041. That is, when the motor 3037 operates, the reflector 3034 is configured to rotate at the rotation speed set by the plurality of gears 3038, 3040, 3041. Further, a light emitting substrate 3043 is provided on the upper surface of the motor base 3036, and the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3043 is guided to the central portion of the reflector 3034 through the light guide tube 3035. The light guide tube 3035 is supported by a reflector pedestal 3033, and is configured to rotate together with the reflector 3034.

Next, the upper left movable decoration unit 3004 will be described in detail. The upper left movable decoration unit 3004 is arranged on the left side of the rotating light unit 3003, and as shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the upper pistol unit 3050 and the lower pistol unit 3051 (which are shaped to imitate the shape of a pistol) ( Hereinafter, the pistol units 3050 and 3051 are moved with the horizontal direction as the axial direction so that the muzzle portion (tip side) of the pair of upper and lower pistol units 3050 and 3051 moves up and down. It is configured to include a drive mechanism 3052. The drive mechanism 3052 is arranged between the base member 3053 arranged in a wall shape, a pair of solenoids 3054 arranged on the right side surface of the base member 3053, and the base member 3053 and the solenoid 3054, and can slide in the vertical direction. A link member 3057 supported by the above and a solenoid cover 3055 that covers the solenoid 3054 from the right side are provided. The link member 3057 has an engaging portion 3057a that engages with the plunger 3056 of the solenoid 3054, and an extending portion 3057b that is vertically hung upward from one end of the engaging portion 3057a, and the engaging portion 3057a is on the player side. Connecting portions 3057c and 3057d, which are connected to the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051, are formed at the end portion and the upper end portion of the extending portion 3057b, respectively.

Further, the base member 3053 and the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 are connected via a support shaft pin 3058. Specifically, a bearing 3059 attached to the protrusion 3053c is provided on the left surface of the base member 3053, and an insertion hole 3065a is provided on the rear right surface of the upper pistol unit 3050 and the lower pistol unit 3051. A fitted bearing 3059 is provided, and the support shaft pin 3058 is rotatably supported by the pair of bearings 3059. That is, each of the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 is rotatably supported around the support shaft pin 3058. On the other hand, shaft pins 3060 are connected to the lower right surfaces of the pistol units 3050 and 3051, respectively. These shaft pins 3060 are arranged in parallel with the support shaft pins 3058, and are connected to the connecting portions 3057c and 3057d of the link member 3057 through the openings 3053a and 3053b formed in the base member 3053. According to this, when the pair of solenoids 3054 is operated to reciprocate the plunger 3056 up and down, a vertical force acts on the shaft pin 3060 via the link member 3057, and the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 are supported. It rotates around the shaft pin 305 between the lower limit position and the upper limit position. Further, a cushioning seal member 3061 is arranged on the left side surface of the base member 3053, and when the pair of pistol units 3050 and 3051 reach the lower limit position, they abut against the cushioning seal member 3061, thereby causing the pistol unit 3050. , 3051 is designed to reduce the impact.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 174, the fist gun units 3050 and 3051 have the appearance of a pistol by combining the right side cover 3065 and the left side cover 3066 divided into two left and right and the finger hook portion 3067 also divided into two left and right. The shape is shaped, and in the internal space 3065a of the right side cover 3065 and the internal space 3066a of the left side cover 3066, a lens portion 3068 arranged at the muzzle portion, a muzzle portion 3069 supporting the outer peripheral portion of the lens portion 3068, and a muzzle portion 3069 A light emitting substrate 3071 housed in a substantially central portion in the front-rear direction and a light guide tube 3070 for guiding the light radiated from the light emitting board 3071 to the rear surface side of the lens portion 3068 are housed. That is, the light radiated from the light emitting substrate 3071 is projected to the player side through the lens unit 3068. Further, the right side cover 3065 and the left side cover 3066 are made of synthetic resin members, and the surface (outer surface) thereof is entirely plated to form a light reflecting surface, so that the outer surface is formed. It is possible to reflect the light emitted from.

Next, the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167, the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 is arranged on the right side of the revolving light unit 3003, and has an appearance that is inverted in the left-right direction as compared with the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, that is, centered on the revolving light unit 3003. It has a line-symmetrical appearance. Since the configuration and operation of the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 are the same as those of the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 is arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and is arranged so as to protrude more toward the player side than the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. As shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, in the lower left movable decorative unit 3006, the pistol unit 3075 shaped to imitate the shape of a pistol and the muzzle portion (tip side) of the pistol unit 3075 move in the left-right direction. It is configured to include a drive mechanism 3076 that moves the pistol unit 3075 with the vertical direction as the axial direction. Here, the pistol unit 3075 corresponds to the decorative body of the present invention, and the drive mechanism 3076 corresponds to the decorative body driving means of the present invention.

The pistol unit 3075 has substantially the same configuration as the pistol units 3050 and 3051 (see FIG. 174), and includes the right side cover 3078 and the left side cover 3079 divided into two left and right, and the finger hook portion 3080 also divided into two left and right. The appearance shape of the pistol is shaped by the combination of. Then, in the internal spaces 3078a and 3079a of the right side cover 3078 and the left side cover 3079, a lens portion 3081 arranged at the muzzle portion, an annular muzzle portion 3082 supporting the outer peripheral portion of the lens portion 3081, and light are emitted. A light emitting substrate 3084 and a light guide tube 3083 that guides the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3084 to the rear surface side of the lens unit 3081 are housed. That is, the light radiated from the light emitting substrate 3084 is configured to be projected to the player side through the lens unit 3081. The right side cover 3078 and the left side cover 3079 are made of synthetic resin members, but the surfaces are light-reflecting surfaces because the entire surface (outer surface) is plated. Here, the light emitting substrate 3084 corresponds to the light emitting means of the present invention.

On the other hand, the drive mechanism 3076 includes a base plate 3087 and a pedestal 3085 arranged on the upper surface of the base plate 3087. The pedestal 3085 has a disk-shaped rotating portion 3085a and a connecting piece 3085b that is erected from the rotating portion 3085a and connected to the finger hook portion 3080 of the pistol unit 3075. Further, on the lower side of the base plate 3087, the motor 3089 supported by the motor base 308, the motor gear 3090 connected to the rotating shaft 3089a of the motor 3089 through which the through hole 3088a of the motor base 3088 is inserted, and the motor gear 3090 mesh with each other. In addition, a transmission gear 3092 rotatably supported by a pin 3091 inserted into the fitting hole 3088b of the motor base 3088 is arranged. That is, when the motor 3089 is operated, the rotational force is transmitted to the pedestal 3085 via the motor gear 3090 and the transmission gear 3092, and the pistol unit 3075 is configured to rotate within a predetermined range. A protrusion 3092a projecting in the centrifugal direction is formed on the transmission gear 3092, and the rotation position of the pistol unit 3075 can be detected by detecting the protrusion 3092a with the photosensor 3093. There is.

Next, the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167, the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 is arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and has an appearance in which the left and right directions are inverted as compared with the lower left movable decoration unit 3006, that is, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is the center. It has an axisymmetric appearance. Since the configuration and operation of the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 are the same as those of the lower left movable decoration unit 3006, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the lower movable decorative unit 3008 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, the lower movable decorative unit 3008 is arranged at a position lower than the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and when it is moved to the effect position (when it rises), it is on the lower side. A part of the movable decorative unit 3008 is located in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the lower movable decorative unit 3008 includes a telephone main body 3100 shaped to imitate the shape of the main body of the telephone, and a handset 3101 shaped to imitate the shape of the handset. It is configured to include a dial unit 3102 housed in the telephone body unit 3100 and visible from the player side, and a handset drive mechanism 3106 for moving the handset unit 3101.

More specifically, on the rear side of the telephone dial portion 3102, an annular lens 3103, a light emitting substrate 3105 that irradiates light from the rear side of the lens 3103, and a light emitting direction of light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3105 are shown. It is provided with a reflector 3104 that limits and efficiently irradiates a predetermined portion of the lens 3103 with light.

Further, the handset drive mechanism 3106 is connected to a base member 3107, a pair of solenoids 3108 fixed to the rear surface of the base member 3107, a solenoid sheet metal 3109 that supports the solenoid 3108 from the rear side, and a plunger 3110 of the solenoid 3108. It includes a plunger link portion 3111 that reciprocates in the vertical direction according to the operation of the solenoid 3108. Further, on the front side of the base member 3107, a left fulcrum crank 3112 and a right fulcrum crank 3113 are arranged so as to overlap a part thereof in the front-rear direction, and the overlapping portion is provided on the rear surface of the telephone main body 3100. It is pivotally supported by a crank pin 3117. In the central portion of the left fulcrum crank 3112 and the right fulcrum crank 3113, an engagement hole 3112a into which a protrusion 3111a in the plunger link portion 3111 (that is, a protrusion 3111a arranged through the opening 3107a of the base member 3107) is inserted, 3113a is formed. Further, on the front side of the left fulcrum crank 3112 and the right fulcrum crank 3113, a pair of left crank 3115 and right crank 3116 having a linearly symmetrical shape are provided, and the lower ends of the left crank 3115 and the right crank 3116 and the left fulcrum are provided. The connecting portions 3112b and 3113b formed at the ends of the crank 3112 and the right fulcrum crank 3113 are respectively connected by the fulcrum crank pin 3114. A bow-shaped pin base 3119 is fixed to the rear surface side of the handset portion 3101, and the fitting portion 3119a of the pin base 3119 and the upper end portions of the left crank 3115 and the right crank 3116 are connected via the insert pin 3118. Is connected.

According to this, by energizing the solenoid 3108 on the left side, the plunger link unit 3111 connected to the solenoid 3108 can be raised, and the left side of the handset unit 3101 can be lifted via the left fulcrum crank 3112 and the left crank 3115. Similarly, by energizing the solenoid 3108 on the right side, the plunger link unit 3111 connected to the solenoid 3108 can be raised, and the right side of the handset unit 3101 can be lifted via the right fulcrum crank 3113 and the right crank 3116.

In this way, the handset drive mechanism 3106 is configured to provide two sets of solenoids 3108 and link mechanisms (fulcrum cranks 3112, 3113 and cranks 3115, 3116) interlocking with the solenoids 3108, and drive them separately. Therefore, the handset unit 3101 is placed on the telephone body unit 3100 (first state), only one end side of the handset unit 3101 is lifted and tilted (second state), and the entire handset unit 3101 is It is possible to selectively switch between the lifted horizontal state (third state). Therefore, for example, if the first state is maintained during standby and the second state and the third state are alternately switched at a predetermined cycle when performing an effect, one end of the handset unit 3101 is lifted. Only the other end side can be repeatedly moved up and down, making it possible to visually recognize that the telephone is in a ringing state, just like in the world of cartoons.

The character decoration unit 3002, the revolving light unit 3003, and the movable decoration units 3004 to 3008 have been described in detail above, but next, the configurations arranged around them will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 167, 179 and 180, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 has an effect space that can be seen through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 151) and a space that cannot be seen. Further, the visible production space includes the upper production space S1 in which the character decoration unit 3002, the revolving light unit 3003, the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, and the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 are arranged, the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the lower left. It is divided into upper and lower parts by a movable decoration unit 3006 and a lower effect space S2 in which the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 is arranged. The outer circumference of the upper effect space S1 is partitioned by the upper space forming unit 3150, and the outer circumference of the lower effect space S2 is partitioned by the pair of lower space forming units 3151. Here, the lower space forming unit 3151 corresponds to the space forming member of the present invention.

Further, a support box 3152 for supporting the liquid crystal panel 3201 (described later) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged between the pair of lower space forming units 3151. Further, in the lower part of the lower effect space S2 formed by the lower space forming unit 3151, that is, in the invisible space, a game in which the ball enters the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, the general winning opening 2203, or the like. A first passage forming member 3153 and a second passage forming member 3155 that guide the ball to a predetermined position, and a plurality of ball entry detecting means 3154 and 3156 that detect the game ball that has entered the ball are arranged. Further, an illuminated relay board 3157 that relays a drive signal transmitted to each light emitting board is arranged on the front left side portion of the back box 3001, and each rear surface lower portion of the back box 3001 is provided. A drive control board 3159 that controls the drive of a motor, a solenoid, etc., an effect control board 3160 that controls an effect by a liquid crystal display device 1400, an upper left movable decoration unit 3004, etc. based on a game state, and a distribution board 3161 that distributes signals. Is supported by the substrate cover 3158.

First, the back box 3001 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 181, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a projecting outward are provided at the front end, and the fixing portions 3001a are provided. It is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 (see FIG. 155) via the game panel 600. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening 3001c formed substantially in the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side can be inserted through the opening 3001c. .. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with mounting portions for mounting and fixing the upper space forming unit 3150, the lower space forming unit 3151, and the like at appropriate positions.

Next, the upper space forming unit 3150 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the upper space forming unit 3150 includes a spherical (dome-shaped) base member 3170 with open front and bottom surfaces. The base member 3170 is formed of a light-transmitting member, has a plurality of light projecting units 3170a capable of projecting light toward the upper effect space S1, and a light projecting unit 3170a when viewed from within the upper effect space S1. A plurality of recesses 3170b formed in a groove shape toward the centrifugal direction are alternately formed along the front edge peripheral direction of the base member 3170. The surface (inner surface) of the recess 3170b is formed as a smooth surface, whereas the light projecting portion 3170a is continuously formed with a wavy uneven surface on the surface, and is formed on the outside of the base member 3170. It is configured so that the arranged members and the like are difficult to see. Further, a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3170c protruding outward are formed at the front end of the base member 3170, and a flange-shaped fixing portion 3170c protruding inward is formed at the rear end of the base member 3170 (not shown). Not) are formed.

A plurality of reflective members 3171 attached from the inside are provided in the plurality of recesses 3170b in the base member 3170, and the inner surface of the light projecting portion 3170a and the inner surface of the reflective member 3171 are continuous surfaces. Further, the reflective member 3171 has a shape in which the front end is bent outward and the rear end is bent inward, and when fitted in the recess 3170b, the front edge portion is also a continuous surface. The reflective member 3171 is made of a synthetic resin member, and the light reflecting surface 3171a is formed on the inner surface by plating the surface (at least the inner surface). Further, each of the light projecting portion 3170a and the light reflecting surface 3171a has a band-like shape elongated in the front-rear direction, and is continuously formed from the front end to the rear end of the upper effect space S1.

Further, on the outside of the base member 3170, three upper light emitting boards 3173 supported by the upper board cover 3172, two left light emitting boards 3175 supported by the left board cover 3174, and right side board cover 3176 supported. Two right light emitting substrates 3177 are provided. The light emitting substrates 3173, 3175, and 3177 are arranged so as to face each of the light projecting units 3170a, and by irradiating the light emitting units 3170a with light, each light emitting unit 3170a is light-emitting and decorated. , It is possible to project light toward the upper production space S1. Further, the upper substrate cover 3172, the left substrate cover 3174, and the right substrate cover 3176 are directly fixed to the inner surface of the back box 3001 (see FIG. 181), and also have a protrusion 3176a provided at the tip of the right substrate cover 3176. The right side substrate cover 3176 and the base member 3170 are relatively positioned by fitting with the engagement hole 3170d formed in the fixing portion 3170c of the base member 3170.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 166, the character decoration unit 3002 imitating a character is light-emittingly decorated and visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 (FIG. 151) to impress the player with the concept of the game machine. At the same time, it is possible to give an impact, but even if the character decoration unit 3002 is light-emitting decorated, if only the character decoration unit 3002 appears to shine, only a part of the character decoration unit 3002 is light-emitting decoration and the upper production space S1 as a whole Will lack power. That is, the effect of the light emitting decoration cannot be sufficiently enhanced, and there is a risk that the interest in the production may be reduced.

On the other hand, in this example, as described above, the upper space forming unit 3150 that partitions the outer periphery of the upper effect space S1, that is, the upper space forming unit 3150 that surrounds the character decoration unit 3002, has the entire inner wall surface of the light projecting unit 3170a. The light emitting inner wall surface 3150a is composed of the light emitting inner wall surface 3171a and the light reflecting surface 3171a. Therefore, the light projected from the light projecting unit 3170a goes toward the upper effect space S1 surrounded by the upper space forming unit 3150, irradiates the outer surface of the character decoration unit 3002, and emits light from the upper space forming unit 3150. The inner wall surface 3150a can be decorated with light emission. Further, since the light reflecting surface 3171a is formed on the portion of the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a where the light emitting portion 3170a is not formed, a part of the light projected from the light emitting portion 3170a is an upper effect space. It will reflect toward S1. As a result, the amount of light emitted to the outer surface of the character decoration unit 3002 increases, and the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a of the upper space forming unit 3150 surrounding the upper effect space S1, that is, the entire periphery of the upper effect space S1 appears to shine brilliantly. Becomes possible. In particular, since the surface of the light reflecting surface 3171a is a smooth mirror surface, the image of the character decoration unit 3002 is projected on the light reflecting surface 3171a, and the gorgeousness of the upper effect space S1 is further enhanced.

Further, since the plurality of light projecting portions 3170a and the plurality of light reflecting surfaces 3171a are alternately arranged side by side on the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a, the light projecting direction and the light reflecting direction change in a complicated manner, and the inside of the light emitting light is emitted. The brilliance of the entire wall surface 3150a can be enhanced. In particular, since each of the light projecting portion 3170a and the light reflecting surface 3171a are formed in a band shape and extend in the front-rear direction, it is possible to make the depth in the upper effect space S1 appear wider than it actually is, and the upper effect space S1 The scale of the production can be further increased by the overall luminous decoration. Further, since they are arranged alternately along the front peripheral edge, it is possible to sufficiently recognize the scattering of light by combining the plurality of light projecting portions 3170a and the light reflecting surface 3171a.

By the way, if the upper space forming unit 3150 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped box with an open front surface (that is, the cross-sectional shape is U-shaped), the player can decorate the back side of the space forming member (that is, character decoration). It faces the surface located behind the unit 3002), and it becomes difficult to see the left and right side surfaces of the space forming member when viewed from the player side. For this reason, even if the entire light emitting inner wall surface of the space forming member is used for light emitting decoration, the force is exerted on the player who is gazing at the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the character decoration unit 3002. It becomes difficult to make an impression, and there is a risk that the effect of the effect will be halved.

On the other hand, according to this example, since the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a of the upper space forming unit 3150 is formed in a spherical shape (that is, a dome shape) as described above, the line of sight is not moved while facing the front. The entire light emitting inner wall surface 3150a can be visually recognized, and even a player who is gazing at the display screen 1400a or the like can recognize the light emitting decoration of the entire upper effect space S1.

In addition, the upper left movable decoration unit 3004 (see FIG. 166) and the pistol units 3050 and 3051 of the upper right movable decoration unit 3005 are arranged as movable decorations in the upper effect space S1 so as to move based on the gaming state and the like. Therefore, the effect of the effect in the upper effect space S1 is further enhanced. Further, since the light projected from the light projecting unit 3170a of the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a or the light reflected by the light reflecting surface 3171a is applied to the outer surface (surface) of the pistol units 3050 and 3051, the pistol unit 3050, The 3051 can be raised to make its movement stand out. In particular, since a light reflecting surface is formed on the outer surface of the pistol units 3050 and 3051, the light projecting direction and the light reflecting direction in the upper effect space S1 change as the pistol units 3050 and 3051 move. The brilliance of the entire upper production space S1 can be further enhanced.

By the way, when the entire light emitting inner wall surface 3150a is light-emitting decorated as described above, a powerful effect can be obtained, but on the other hand, the amount of light emitted to the outer surface of the character decoration unit 3002 increases, so that the character The relative brightness of the decorative unit 3002 itself due to the light emitting decoration is reduced, and the decorative effect may be inconspicuous.

On the other hand, according to this example, the character decoration unit 3002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the upper effect space S1, that is, at the position farthest from the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a, and is arranged on both the left and right sides of the character decoration unit 3002, that is, the character. Since the pistol units 3050 and 3051 are arranged between the decoration unit 3002 and the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a, respectively, the amount of light that irradiates the outer surface of the character decoration unit 3002 can be increased while the entire light emitting inner wall surface 3150a is light emitting and decorated. It can be suppressed, and by extension, the relative brightness of the character decoration unit 3002 can be increased to make the decoration effect stand out.

Further, since the pistol units 3050 and 3051 move up and down along the arrangement direction of the light emitting unit 3170a and the light reflecting surface 3171a constituting the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a, the pistol units 3050 and 3051 are projected as the pistol units 3050 and 3051 move. The distance from the part 3170a to the pistol units 3050 and 3051 and the distance from the light reflecting surface 3171a to the pistol units 3050 and 3051 reciprocally change, and the irradiation angle to the pistol units 3050 and 3051 and the pistol units 3050 and 3051 The direction of light reflection can be effectively changed.

Further, since the light is projected from the player-side surface (that is, the front surface) of the pistol units 3050 and 3051, the light from the front surface (that is, the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a) facing the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 is irradiated. (Difficult parts) can also be illuminated, and effective light emission decoration using the entire pistol units 3050 and 3051 becomes possible.

Further, since the rotating light unit 3003 is provided in the upper effect space S1 and the light is projected radially, the light reflecting surface 3171a formed on the light emitting inner wall surface 3150a can be evenly illuminated, and the entire upper effect space S1 can be illuminated. The brilliance of the light can be further enhanced.

Next, the lower space forming unit 3151 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 179, the lower space forming unit 3151 forms the outer periphery of the lower effect space S2, and is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the support box 3152. As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the lower space forming unit 3151 arranged on the left side of the support box 3152 has a side enclosure 3180a located on the left side of the lower effect space S2 and a rear side of the lower effect space S2. It has a rear enclosure portion 3180b located at, and includes a left wall member 3180 formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. Further, the lower space forming unit 3151 emits light to the left decorative portion 3181 and the left lens 3182 and the left lens 3182 attached from the outside to the opening window 3180c formed in the side surrounding portion 3180a of the left wall member 3180. It is provided with a left light emitting substrate 3183 that emits light to decorate the left lens 3182 by irradiating it and emits light toward the lower effect space S2. The left lens 3182 is formed with a character-shaped character light emitting portion 3182a projecting inward, and the left decorative portion 3181 includes an accommodating portion 3181a for accommodating the left lens 3182 from the outside and an accommodating portion 3181a. A character window 3181b formed on the inner surface and into which the character light emitting portion 3182a of the left lens 3182 is fitted is provided. That is, it is configured so that only the character light emitting portion 3182a appears to shine due to the light emitted from the left light emitting substrate 3183. Here, the left lens 3182 corresponds to the character-shaped lens of the present invention, and the left light emitting substrate 3183 corresponds to the light emitting source of the present invention. Further, a combination of the left lens 3182 and the left light emitting substrate 3183 corresponds to the light projecting unit of the present invention.

On the other hand, the lower space forming unit 3151 located on the right side of the lower effect space S2 has the side enclosure 3184a located on the right side of the lower effect space S2 and the lower effect space S2, similarly to the lower space forming unit 3151 on the left side. A right wall member 3184 having a rear enclosure 3184b located on the rear side, a right decorative portion 3185 and a right lens attached from the outside to an opening window 3184c formed in the side enclosure 3184a of the right wall member 3184. It is provided with a 3186 and a right light emitting substrate 3187 that irradiates the right lens 3186 with light to illuminate the right lens 3186 and emits light to the lower effect space S2. Here, the right lens 3186 corresponds to the character lens of the present invention, and the right light emitting substrate 3187 corresponds to the light emitting source of the present invention. Further, a combination of the right lens 3186 and the right light emitting substrate 3187 corresponds to the light projecting unit of the present invention.

The lower space forming unit 3151 that partitions the outer periphery of the lower effect space S2 is provided with a left light emitting substrate 3183 and a right light emitting substrate 3187 that emit light toward the lower effect space S2, but the upper space. It does not have a configuration corresponding to the light reflecting surface 3171a of the forming unit 3150 and is a non-reflecting surface. For this reason, the brilliance of the entire lower effect space S2 is somewhat suppressed as compared with the upper effect space S1, and the phenomenon that the effect image on the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is difficult to be visually recognized due to the glare of the surroundings is suppressed. be able to.

Next, the support box 3152 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the support box 3152 supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 186) and decorates the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1400, as shown in FIGS. 184 and 185. A box-shaped liquid crystal cover 3190 having an opening window 3190a having a size capable of visually recognizing the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed on the front surface, and the rear surface and the bottom surface are open. Further, the support box 3152 is attached to a frame-shaped front decorative frame 3191 attached to the front surface of the liquid crystal cover 3190 so as to surround the periphery of the opening window 3190a of the liquid crystal cover 3190, and to the upper front surface of the front decorative frame 3191. It is equipped with a light emitting decoration unit 3199. The light emitting decorative unit 3199 includes a decorative frame portion 3192 having a length substantially equal to the width of the front decorative frame 3191, and a blue lens 3193, a yellow lens 3194, and a red lens fitted into the opening 3192a of the decorative frame portion 3192 from the rear side. The 3195, the light emitting substrate 3196 that irradiates light from the rear side to decorate these lenses 3193, 3194, 3195 to emit light, the spacer 3197 interposed between the light emitting substrate 3196 and the front decorative frame 3191, and the front decoration. It is composed of a pair of plating decorations 3198 arranged on the left and right ends of the frame 3191, respectively. Here, the opening window 3190a corresponds to the opening of the present invention, and the blue lens 3193, the yellow lens 3194, and the red lens 3195 correspond to the light emitting decoration part of the present invention.

Next, the display unit 3162 having the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described in detail. The display unit 3162 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 by a pair of lock members 3163 (see FIG. 180), and is attached to the base member 3200 and the front side of the base member 3200 as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187. A liquid crystal panel 3201 that is attached and has a display screen 1400a on its surface, a frame-shaped liquid crystal case 3202 that houses the liquid crystal panel 3201, and a display screen 1400a that is arranged in front of the liquid crystal panel 3201 and housed in the liquid crystal case 3202. It is provided with a grid-like grid member 3203 for covering. Here, the combination of the base member 3200, the liquid crystal panel 3201, and the liquid crystal case 3202 corresponds to the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 1400 (the effect display means of the present invention), and the lattice member 3203 corresponds to the decorative plate of the present invention. To do.

Further, on the rear surface of the base member 3200, a relay board 3204 for relaying a drive signal transmitted to the liquid crystal panel 3201, a peripheral control board 3207 supported by the board installation member 3205, and a rom mounted via a spacer 3211. A substrate 3209 and a scaler substrate 3210 are arranged. The rom substrate 3209 and the scaler substrate 3210 are supported by the substrate cover 3206 and the substrate stay 3208.

By the way, in a general game machine, the display screen of the effect display device can be visually recognized by surrounding players, especially the player who is playing in the next seat, and the effect image displayed on the display screen can be easily seen. ing. In particular, when the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is in the reach state or when a special production image appears, a sound effect is also generated accordingly, so that the surrounding players are made aware of the production content and peep. It is a factor to be done. Then, when the player is peeped by the surrounding players in this way, it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, the unpleasant mood is aroused, and the motivation to play is reduced.

On the other hand, in this example, as described above, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 (see FIG. 188) and the lower right movable decoration unit 3007's pistol unit 3075 are arranged on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400, respectively. The pair of pistol units 3075 are arranged so as to protrude toward the player side from the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 188, the player who sees the display screen 1400a and the pair of pistol units 3075 from the front clearly recognizes the effect image displayed on the display screen 1400a without being blocked by the pistol unit 3075. However, the player in the next seat who wants to peep at the effect image (hereinafter referred to as "peep player") tries to see the display screen 1400a from the left-right diagonal direction as shown in FIG. 189 or FIG. 190. Therefore, the line of sight is blocked by the protruding pistol unit 3075, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize a part of the display screen 1400a. In particular, since the light reflecting surface is formed by plating on the outer surface of the pistol unit 3075, even if a part of the display screen 1400a is visible, the shining pistol unit 3075 and the effect image of the display screen 1400a can be displayed. It must be visually recognized repeatedly, making it difficult to peep. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of the peeping player and, by extension, suppress the decrease in the motivation to play due to the peeping.

Further, since the pair of pistol units 3075 move based on the gaming state, the light reflection direction can be changed as the pistol unit 3075 moves, which makes it difficult for the peeping player to see. It becomes possible to promote. Further, since the movable range of the pistol unit 3075 is within the area on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400, that is, within the area between the eyes of the peeping player and the display screen 1400a, the operation of the pistol unit 3075 Even inside, the line of sight of the peeping player can always be blocked.

Further, since the light is projected from the player-side surface (that is, the front surface) of the pistol unit 3075, the front surface (that is, the surrounding light) facing the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 is hard to be irradiated and forms a reflective surface. Even if it is difficult to make it shine, it is possible to make it shine, which in turn makes it even more difficult for the peeping player to see it. In particular, since the pistol unit 3075 turns within a predetermined range with the vertical direction as the axial direction, it is possible to temporarily match the line of sight of the peeping player with the light projection direction as the pistol unit 3075 operates. As a result, it is possible to cause the peeping player to dazzle and to eliminate the feeling of peeping.

Further, as described above, a lower effect space S2 partitioned by the lower space forming unit 3151 is formed on the rear side of the center accessory 2400, and the pistol unit 3075 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 form the lower effect space S2. It is located inside. Further, the lower space forming unit 3151 is provided with a left light emitting substrate 3183 and a right light emitting substrate 3187 that project light into the lower effect space S2. Therefore, the relative brightness of the display screen 1400a in the lower effect space S2 is reduced, and it is possible to further increase the difficulty of visual recognition by the peeping player.

Further, since the lower space forming unit 3151 is composed of the side enclosure portions 3180a and 3184a and the rear enclosure portions 3180b and 3184b, the player who visually recognizes the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is shown in FIG. 188. As described above, the side enclosures 3180a and 3184a are viewed diagonally forward to the left and right while facing the rear enclosures 3180b and 3184b. Then, as shown in FIG. 185, since the left light emitting substrate 3183 and the right light emitting substrate 3187 that project light into the lower effect space S2 are provided in the side enclosure portions 3180a and 3184a, when the display screen 1400a is visually recognized. , The possibility of directly seeing the left lens 3182 and the right lens 3186 is reduced, and the light projected from the left lens 3182 and the right lens 3186 is less likely to be dazzled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 189 or FIG. 190, the peeping player tries to look into the display screen 1400a from diagonally forward, so that the left lens 3182 and the right lens 3186 provided in the side enclosures 3180a and 3184a are used. You will be able to see it directly, and you will feel even more dazzling. Further, since the left lens 3182 and the right lens 3186 emit light from the character light emitting unit 3182a in the shape of a character, the peeping player can visually recognize the effect image displayed on the display screen 1400a. Since the shape of the character light emitting unit 3182a and the effect image are viewed in an overlapping manner, the impact of the effect image is weakened, and the motivation to peep can be reduced.

Further, as described above, the entire display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is covered with a grid-like grid member 3203, and the grid member 3203 is arranged so as to face the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 188, the player who visually recognizes the display screen 1400a from the front sees the effect image through the mesh of the lattice member 3203. For example, a dot display composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged vertically and horizontally. Such a production image will be visually recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 189 or FIG. 190, the peeping player visually recognizes the lattice member 3203 from diagonally forward, so that the viewing angle of the effect image is narrowed by the thickness of the lattice member 3203, and thus the viewing angle is visually recognized. Becomes extremely difficult.

Further, as described above, the character decoration unit 3002 is arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the size of the character decoration unit 3002 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the display screen 1400a, and the size of the character decoration unit 3002 is larger than that of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is closer to the player side than the display screen 1400a. For this reason, even a peeping player who tries to peep at the display screen 1400a from diagonally above, specifically, a player standing behind the player or a player walking in the aisle behind the player is also peeped. It can be difficult to make.

Further, since the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged further back than the lower movable decoration unit 3008 (see FIG. 166), the viewing angle of the display screen 1400a is narrowed to further view from the left and right diagonal directions. Make it difficult.

Further, as shown in FIG. 185, the front frame portion of the liquid crystal cover 3190 is provided with a blue lens 3193, a yellow lens 3194, and a red lens 3195 that emit light toward the player. Therefore, the periphery of the display screen 1400a becomes conspicuous, and it is possible to make it difficult for the peeping player who is trying to look into the display screen 1400a to gaze at the line of sight.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main board 4000 and a group of the peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 1186 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of the peripheral board 4010 is the peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the command from the peripheral control board 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control board 3281 that controls the display of an image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 191, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-mentioned. It is equipped with a RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU4100a has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions for doing so.

The main control MPU4100a includes a first start port sensor 2012 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2349 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2002, and a part thereof. The detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 2014 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the magnetic sensor 3406 attached to the gate sensor 2302, the general winning opening sensor 2014, the count sensor 2013, and the back unit 3000. The detection signal from is input via the panel relay board 3247 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2109 and the grand prize opening solenoid 2347 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3247, or main control. First special symbol display 641, second special symbol display 642, first special symbol storage display 643, second special symbol storage via I / O port 4100b, panel relay board 3247, and function display board 640a. A drive signal is output to the display unit 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the game state display 647, the round display 648, and the hold state display unit 3152 of the center accessory 2400.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information), various commands related to payout, and the like to the payout control board 1186 via the above-mentioned main drawer relay board 1107, or a pachinko machine from the payout control board 1186. Various commands and the like related to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, it shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

Although a detailed description thereof will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 1136. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU4100a can store various information in its built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 191 of the payout control board 1186 that controls the payout of the game ball, the payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control unit 4120 that controls the launch of the launch motor 695 described above, and the launch control unit 4120 described above. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 191 of the payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 1186, the payout control MPU4110a as a microprocessor, the payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and the payout control An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as "external WDT4110c") that monitors whether or not the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, and It is configured with. The payout control MPU4110a has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a built-in function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU4110a will be described in detail later, but may receive various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout, or operate the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the signal (detection signal) being input, the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is input, and the detection signals from the ball burnout switch 778, counting switch 812 and rotation angle switch 855 are relay terminals in the prize ball unit. It may be input via the board 830.

When the payout control MPU4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout control MPU4110a outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d is used to discharge (pull out) the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on the operation signal (detection signal). When a drive signal is output from the payout motor 815 or a ball lending request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the ball lending request signal is used for payout. When a drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 or a detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is input, a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 is output based on this detection signal. It stops and the payout motor 815 is stopped.

Further, the payout control MPU4110a displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the status to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 1150a. The external terminal plate 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, the launch control unit 4120 that controls the launch of the launch motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a into which various signals are input and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, as shown in FIG. 4120b, a launch control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse that determines the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 based on this clock signal, and a drive signal that outputs a drive signal to the launch motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the launch control circuit 4120c. It is configured to include a launch motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that about 99.95 game balls are launched toward the game area 605 per minute based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. .. That is, the movement of the above-mentioned hitting mallet 687 is controlled.

As described above, the handle device 460 (operation handle portion 410) has a touch sensor 420 and a launch stop switch 422 built-in, and when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 410 is touched, the touch sensor is built. It is detected by 420, and when the single-shot button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. These detection signals will be described in detail later, but are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. Further, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as in the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU4110a can store various payout information related to payout in its built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 191, the peripheral control board 4140 that performs the effect control on the peripheral board 4010 performs high-quality sound performance with the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands. It is configured to include a sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU4140a has various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watch dock timer (WDT), and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, it is based on these various commands. , A lighting signal or a blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5. A lighting / blinking command on the door frame side is output to the lamp drive board 3167, or each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided in the game board 4 is output. Outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the LED of the game board. A lighting / blinking command on the game board side is output to the lamp drive board 3167, or a left rotating light motor 245 and a right rotating light of the top lamp lighting unit 200 provided in the door frame 5. A door frame side motor drive command that outputs a rotation drive signal to the motor 265 and the central rotary light motor 285 is output to the motor drive board 3013a, and a rotation drive signal is output to the drive motors 3037 and 3089 provided in the game board 4. Shows a screen for outputting a motor drive command on the game board side to the motor drive board 3013a, outputting a control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d to the sound source IC 4140c, or displaying the screen on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display command is output to the liquid crystal control board 3281.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 3281 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, door frame side motor drive command, game board side motor drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3167 or the motor drive board 3013a. , It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp drive board 3167 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , 225, 296, etc., or received a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the lighting / blinking command on the game board side, each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided on the game board 4, or the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5. Is output to the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453 in the above. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013a sends a rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command to the left rotation light motor 245 and the right rotation light motor 265 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , And outputs to the central rotary light motor 285, and outputs rotation drive signals to various drive motors 3037 and 3089 provided in the game board 4 based on the received game board side motor drive command.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a is a detection signal from a position detection sensor (photosensor 3042, 3093) that detects the movable positions of the revolving light unit 3003, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006, and the lower right movable decoration unit 3007 of the game board 4, respectively. Is input via the motor drive board 3013a, respectively, and the original position is grasped based on these detection signals. Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotation lights 244, 264, 284 of the door frame 5 respectively , The sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013a are input respectively, and the rotation positions of the respective rotary lights 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 3281 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control board 3281, or the operation button unit 370 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 Operation detection signals from the main button sensor 376 and the sub button sensor 378 that detect the operation of the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp drive board 3167. The main button 371 is provided with a vibrating body 371c, and a drive signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp drive board 3167. There is.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and via the lamp drive board 3167 and the sub drawer relay board 1108, the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 Controls the flow of music and sound effects that match various effects.

The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the built-in watchdog timer (built-in WDT) and the external WDT together to perform peripheral control. It is diagnosing whether the system of MPU4140a is out of control.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, as shown in the figure, the liquid crystal control board 3281 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral board 4010 includes the liquid crystal control MPU4150a as a microprocessor and the liquid crystal control that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data. The ROM 4150b, the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 described above, the character ROM 4150d that stores various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the character ROM 4150d that is stored in the character ROM 4150d. It is equipped with a character RAM 4150e to which various data are transferred and copied.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel input / output port, serial input / output port, etc., and when the above-mentioned display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but it is based on the received display command. The VDP4150c is controlled to control the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in time series when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area described later in the character RAM 4150e. .. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined in advance for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the screen data at the beginning of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs the schedule data to the VDP 4150c. .. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the screen data following the first screen data and outputs it to the VDP4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data described later from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. , The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. In this "line buffer method", one line of drawing data for drawing the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in the line buffer, and one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. This is the output method.

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state. Here, the "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit united on the liquid crystal display device 1400. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites"). The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, 2 horizontal × 3 vertical. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the left-right direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels in order from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by a main scan that sets the state and a sub scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 3281 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b is based on the drawing data for one line, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is used as the main scan. From left to right, the data is output to each line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the process shifts to the line immediately below as a sub scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same manner, the liquid crystal display is displayed as the main scan based on the drawing data for the next line. Output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right of the device 1400.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) that is lit by the inverter board 3017a.

[4. Game content]
The content of the game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle portion 410 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 of the plate unit 300 are generated by the game panel. It is driven into the upper part of the game area 605 arranged in front of the 600, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 605 will flow down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2400 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the driving force can be. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 600, and when the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the game ball flows down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

The game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2400 is guided to the area on the right side of the center accessory 2400, enters the gate 2300a arranged at the lower right of the center accessory 2400, and is detected by the gate sensor 2302. Then, based on the detection signal, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 (state display unit 2202) is variablely displayed (the ordinary symbol display 645 composed of one LED is changed to red, green, and orange. The normal symbol is emitted alternately), extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds), and the normal symbol based on the normal random number (normal lottery result) is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 645 is either red or green). It emits light. The variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table.

Specifically, if the lottered ordinary random number is a "normal hit" random number, it will be stopped and displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (the ordinary symbol display 645 emits green light), and the lottered ordinary random number will be a "normal loss" random number. In the case of, the stop display (the normal symbol display 645 emits red light) is displayed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss. Then, when the normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of blades 2106 that close the second starting port 2002 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the second A game ball can be awarded to the starting port 2002.

The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the blade 2106 at the second starting port 2002 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. For example, a special random number (special lottery) may be changed. As a result), when "time reduction hit (including normal time reduction hit, high probability time reduction hit, etc.)" is extracted, the fluctuation time and expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the ordinary symbol variation pattern table for selecting the ordinary symbol variation pattern can be easily changed by replacing the ordinary symbol variation pattern table with a different table and then selecting the table.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302 while the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 645, the changing normal symbol is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the ordinary random number is confirmed, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is temporarily stored and its display is suspended. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 646. This ordinary symbol storage display 646 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of stored LEDs is suggested by the number of each LED that lights up. In this example, up to four LEDs are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of stored items exceeds four, the ordinary random numbers extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2302 are discarded.

Further, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2400 is brought to the center side of the game area 605 under the center accessory 2400 by the side winning opening unit 2200. .. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 2203 of the side winning opening unit 2200 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2014, the main control board 4100 determines the payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout command is transmitted, and the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the storage tray 311. It has become like. Further, when a prize is won in the general winning opening 2102a of the electric winning opening unit 2100, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the storage plate 311 as in the case of the general winning opening 2203. There is.

The game ball driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning openings 2203 and 2102a, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, the special winning opening 2010b, and the large winning opening 2003. In this case, the game area 605 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning opening 2003, 2102a, the first starting port 2001, the second starting opening 2002, the special winning opening 2010b, or the large winning opening 2003, the winning game ball is a game. It is designed to be discharged downward on the rear side of the game board 4 without being returned to the area 605.

Then, when the game balls are received by the first start port 2001 and detected by the first start port sensor 2012, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are transmitted from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is being paid out to the storage dish 311.

By the way, when the game ball enters the gate 2300a, is detected by the gate sensor 2302, and a "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, as described above, a pair of blades 2106 that close the second starting port 2002 When the game ball is received by the second starting port 2002 and detected by the second starting port sensor 2349 when the winning is possible after expanding for a predetermined time, the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 2349 via the main control board 4100 or the like. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311.

Further, in the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 and is detected by the first start port sensor 2012 and the second start port sensor 2349, the first start is performed. A predetermined first special random number is generated / extracted at the mouth 2001, and a predetermined second special random number is generated / extracted at the second starting port 2002. Then, based on the extracted special random numbers, it is extracted after the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode suggesting "big hit" in the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, the winning door 2113 of the attacker unit 2104 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is won in the big prize opening 2003 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired.

Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode suggesting "small hit" on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, the tongue-shaped haunting piece 2018 of the special winning section 2015 is designated. A second special game state that appears in the pattern occurs, and during that time, a large number of game balls can be obtained by winning a game ball in the special winning opening 2010b.

At the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 can be used in the same manner as the fluctuation display of the normal symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the gate 2300a. When the special symbol is variablely displayed, or when the special symbol cannot be variablely displayed, such as during a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state, the game ball wins a prize at the starting openings 2001 and 2002, and the first starting opening sensor 2012, No. (Ii) When detected by the start port sensor 2349, the first special is extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 2012 and the second start port sensor 2349 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible. A random number or a second special random number is stored and its display is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is displayed on the first special symbol storage display 643 or the second special symbol storage display 644. It is designed to do. The first special symbol storage display 643 and the second special symbol storage display 644 each consist of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs that are turned off, turned on, and blinking. In this example, up to four of each are memorized and displayed. If the number of stored items exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded.

Further, in the main control board 4100, the special random numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 2012 and the second start port sensor 2349 are set to predetermined random numbers. By collating with the judgment table (also called the special symbol fluctuation pattern table), it is possible to determine whether the special random number is "miss", "small hit", or "big hit", and for "big hit", , "2R jackpot" or "15R jackpot" is also determined. In addition, the random number determination table also determines "probability variation time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit", "time reduction hit", "probability variation time reduction hit", and the like.

Then, the first special random number and the second special random number (lottery) extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001 and the second start port sensor 2349 (the result of the special lottery) are "small hits". In the case of ", the main control board 4100 has a plurality of opening / closing patterns in which the tongue-shaped infestation piece 2018 of the special winning portion 2015 is projected for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) and then closed. It is possible to repeatedly win a game ball into the special winning opening 2010b (for example, twice).

On the other hand, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is a "big hit", the main control board 4100 takes a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after opening the winning door 2113 of the attacker unit 2104. ) Elapsed, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls meet any of the conditions for winning the large winning opening 2003, the winning door 2113 is closed (one round of opening / closing pattern). (Referred to as) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), 2 rounds for a "2R jackpot" and 15 rounds for a "15R jackpot", each of which is an advantageous game advantageous to the player. It is designed to generate a state. After the end of the predetermined number of rounds, for the "big hit", the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time-saving table or the like according to the extracted special random numbers.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted with the start winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2002 (special lottery). (According to the result), the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 are displayed in a variable manner, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 also responds to a special random number (special lottery result). The effect image E is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped. When it is displayed and finally all the symbol strings are stopped and displayed, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, the effect image E that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed after the plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed according to the special lottery result due to the start winning. Since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols of the first and second special symbol indicators 641 and 642, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. We will pay attention to the design.

As one of the effect images E in which the plurality of symbol strings are variablely displayed, a "reach effect" is displayed so that the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed while leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach). There is an "image", and as a special lottery result in which this "reach effect image" is displayed, there are "reach hit" and "reach loss". There is also a "reach development effect image" that is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image" and that after the reach display, the remaining symbol sequence that is variablely displayed is emphasized and displayed. Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game.

The variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 191). The variable display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 3281 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. ing. As a result, since the variation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400, which the player pays particular attention to, is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100. For one command, a plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance to increase the number of symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, the "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game or the like is also controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, and various patterns of effect images are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the load of arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

Further, in accordance with the effect image E displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of accessories, specifically, the revolving light unit 3003, the upper left movable decoration unit 3004, the upper right movable decoration unit 3005, the lower left movable decoration unit 3006, The lower right movable decoration unit 3007 and the lower movable decoration unit 3008 are movable (see FIG. 188). For example, in the upper left movable decoration unit 3004 and the upper right movable decoration unit 3005, the pistol units 3050 and 3051 are rotated in the vertical direction, and in the lower left movable decoration unit 3006 and the lower right movable decoration unit 3007, the pistol unit 3075 is rotated in the left and right direction. It is supposed to be done. Further, in the lower movable decorative unit 3008, the handset unit 3101 is lifted with respect to the telephone main body unit 3100 and vibrates up and down.

Further, on the lower decoration 2418 provided at the lower part of the center accessory 2400, the number of special random numbers displayed on the first special symbol storage display 643 and the second special symbol storage display 644 (that is, the first special random number and the like). The number of lighting units 2418b (see FIG. 165) corresponding to the number of the second special random numbers held) is displayed by light emission. In the first special symbol storage display 643 and the second special symbol storage display 644, the number of stored lights is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of each LED, whereas in the lower decoration 2418, the stored number of holds and the light emitting display are displayed. Since the number of lighting units 2418b is the same as the number of lighting units 2418b, it is generally possible for the player to easily grasp the number of holdings from the lighting unit 2418b, and pay attention to the lighting unit 2418b light-emitting and displayed by the lower decoration 2418. Will be done.

[5. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pistol units 3075 are arranged on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400, respectively, and these pair of pistol units 3075 are more games than the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Since it is arranged so as to protrude toward the person, it is possible to block the line of sight of the peeping player who is trying to peep at the effect image and make a part of the display screen 1400a invisible. In particular, since the light reflecting surface is formed by plating on the outer surface of the pistol unit 3075, even if a part of the display screen 1400a is visible, the shining pistol unit 3075 and the effect image of the display screen 1400a can be displayed. It must be visually recognized in layers, which makes it difficult to peep. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of the peeping player and, by extension, suppress the decrease in the motivation to play due to the peeping.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the pair of pistol units 3075 move based on the gaming state, the light reflection direction can be changed with the movement of the pistol unit 3075, and as a result, the pistol can be seen. It can promote the difficulty of visual recognition for the spectator. Further, since the movable range of the pistol unit 3075 is within the area between the eyes of the peeping player and the display screen 1400a, the line of sight of the peeping player is always blocked even during the operation of the pistol unit 3075. Can be done.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light is projected from the player-side surface of the pistol unit 3075, it is possible to further increase the difficulty of visibility for the peeping player. In particular, since the pistol unit 3075 turns within a predetermined range with the vertical direction as the axial direction, it is possible to temporarily match the line of sight of the peeping player with the light projection direction as the pistol unit 3075 operates. It can, by extension, cause glare to the peep player and eliminate the desire to peep.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower space forming unit 3151 that divides the lower effect space S2 in which the pistol unit 3075 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 are arranged emits light in the lower effect space S2. Since the left light emitting board 3183 and the right light emitting board 3187 for projecting light are provided, the relative brightness of the display screen 1400a in the lower effect space S2 is lowered, which makes it difficult for the peeping player to see. Can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower space forming unit 3151 is composed of the side enclosure portions 3180a and 3184a and the rear enclosure portions 3180b and 3184b, and the left side that projects light into the lower effect space S2. Since the light emitting board 3183 and the right light emitting board 3187 are provided in the side enclosures 3180a and 3184a, when the peeping player tries to peep into the display screen 1400a from diagonally forward, the side enclosures 3180a and 3184a The left side lens 3182 and the right side lens 3186 provided are directly visually recognized, and the person feels more dazzling. Further, since the left lens 3182 and the right lens 3186 emit light from the character light emitting unit 3182a, the shape of the character light emitting unit 3182a even if the effect image displayed on the display screen 1400a can be visually recognized. By superimposing the production image and the production image, the impact of the production image is weakened, and the motivation to peep can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the entire display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is covered with the grid-like grid member 3203, the viewing angle of the effect image is narrowed with respect to the grid member 3203. It is possible to make the visual perception of the peeping player who is visually recognized from diagonally forward extremely difficult.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the character decoration unit 3002 that protrudes toward the player side from the display screen 1400a is arranged above the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display screen 1400a is viewed from diagonally above. It is possible to make it difficult for a peeping player who wants to peep to peep.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged further behind the lower movable decoration unit 3008, the viewing angle of the display screen 1400a is narrowed and the diagonal direction is narrowed. It can be made more difficult to see from.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front frame portion of the liquid crystal cover 3190 is provided with a blue lens 3193, a yellow lens 3194, and a red lens 3195 that emit light toward the player. Therefore, the periphery of the display screen 1400a becomes conspicuous, and it is possible to make it difficult for the peeping player who is trying to look into the display screen 1400a to gaze at the display screen 1400a.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, a movable decorative body (handgun unit 3075) is provided as a decorative body on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400, but the decorative body supported in a fixed state is provided. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment, the left handgun unit 3075 is arranged so as to always protrude from the display screen 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a reach effect or a special effect. (That is, only when it is easy to be peeped), a configuration may be adopted in which the display screen is moved so as to be closer to the player side than the display screen 1400a.

Further, in the above embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged in the lower effect space S2 and the character decoration unit 3002 is arranged in the upper effect space S1, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged in the upper effect space S1. , The character decoration unit 3002 and the like may be arranged in the lower effect space S2.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 605 Game area 600 Game panel (game board)
2400 Center accessory (center frame)
2400a Aperture window 1400 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
1400a Display screen 2420 Stage 2423 Warp passage member (warp passage)
3002 Character decoration unit (second decoration)
3008 Lower movable decoration unit (lower movable decoration body)
3075 Handgun unit (decorative body)
3076 Drive mechanism (decorative body drive means)
3084 Light emitting substrate (light emitting means)
3151 Lower space forming unit (space forming member)
3152 Support box 3180a Side enclosure 3180b Rear enclosure 3182 Left lens (light projector, character lens)
3183 Left light emitting board (light emitting part, light emitting source)
3184a Side enclosure 3184b Rear enclosure 3186 Right lens (light projection, character lens)
3187 Right light emitting board (light emitting part, light emitting source)
3190a Aperture window (opening)
3193 Blue lens (light emitting decoration part)
3194 Yellow lens (light emitting decoration part)
3195 Red lens (light emitting decoration part)
3203 Lattice member (decorative board)

JP-A-2005-13703

Claims (1)

It ’s a game machine,
A game board having a game area and an opening,
An entrance provided in the game area and capable of accepting game media,
A game medium detecting means capable of detecting acceptance of the game medium by the receiving port, and
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information in response to detection of the game medium by the game medium detection means, and
A lottery means capable of performing a lottery as to whether or not a privilege is given to a player based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and
A display means having a display area arranged in the opening, and
A movable decorative body arranged at a position around the display area when viewed from the front,
When the display area is viewed from the front of the movable decoration arranged at a position around the display area , the movable decoration blocks the front of the display area so that the visible area becomes smaller. Decorative body movable means to make
Sound output means to output sound and
An effect control means capable of controlling the display means, the decorative body movable means, and the sound output means, respectively.
With
The display means can display a display effect including a variation effect in the display area according to the result of the lottery based on the lottery information.
The effect control means
The visible area becomes smaller when the display area is viewed from the front in accordance with the output of a specific sound by the sound output means while the display means advances the display effect in the display area according to the result of the lottery. At the same time, the movable display area is movable so that the visible area of the display area becomes smaller when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged, as compared with the case where the display area is viewed from the front. The movable decorative body effect for operating the decorative body is configured to be feasible with the movable decorative body arranged at a position around the display area.
The movable decorative body capable of executing the movable decorative body effect is provided with a light emitting unit whose light emission is controlled toward the player side surface by the effect control means.
When the movable decorative body effect is executed, when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged, the visible area of the display area is larger than that when the display area is viewed from the front. The movable decorative body, which is operated by the decorative body movable means so as to be small, is in a standby state before being operated by the decorative body movable means and after being operated by the decorative body movable means through the opening. Arranged so that it can be seen in any of the operating states
The light emitting portion provided on the movable decorative body is subjected to the movable decorative body effect, and the display area is viewed from the front when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged. Light emission is controlled when the visible area of the display area is smaller than in the case.
In the standby state in which the movable decorative body is not operated by the movable decorative body, the line of sight of the movable decorative body is blocked by the movable decorative body when the display area is viewed obliquely from the direction in which the movable decorative body is arranged. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided so as to protrude from the display area side of the display means toward the player side.

Images